Instrukcja obsługi Hitachi DZ-HS903A
Hitachi
kamera wideo
DZ-HS903A
Przeczytaj poniżej 📖 instrukcję obsługi w języku polskim dla Hitachi DZ-HS903A (191 stron) w kategorii kamera wideo. Ta instrukcja była pomocna dla 7 osób i została oceniona przez 2 użytkowników na średnio 4.5 gwiazdek
Strona 1/191

DZ-HS903A
DZ-HS803A Instruction Manual
DZ-HS903A
DZ-HS803A
This manual was printed
with soy based ink.
Printed on recycled paper
Printed in Japan OY-K (I)
QR74442 ©Hitachi, Ltd. 2008
Thank you for purchasing this Hitachi Camcorder.
Please read this Instruction Manual to understand its proper use.
Before opening the CD-ROM included with this product, please read
p.182.
After reading the Instruction Manual, store it safely.
The Instruction Manual contains an illustration of the DZ-HS803A
on the cover page only.
DZ-HS803A
DZ-HS903A
DZ-HS903A
DZ-HS803A

2
Important Information
For Your Safety
The power switch turns the camcorder on and off, leaving the date/time feature unaffected. If the
camcorder is to be left unattended for a long period of time, turn it off.
Th e D VD video came ra/reco rder and AC adapter/c harge r have the fo llo wing cau tion marks .
The camcorder and AC adapter/charger
have the following caution marks.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT OPEN.
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Identifications of caution marks
Precautions
WARNING: Many television programs and
films are copyrighted. In certain circumstances,
copy-right law may apply to private in-home
videotaping of copyrighted materials.
Avoid using and storing the battery pack in
places subject to direct sunlight, high
temperatures, or near a flame source.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE.
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD,
BE SURE TO USE THE SPECIFIED AC ADAPTER/
CHARGER (DZ-ACS3).
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This symbol warns the user that
uninsulated voltage within the unit
may have sufficient magnitude to
cause electric shock. Therefore, it is
dangerous to make any kind of
contact with any inside part of this
unit.
This symbol alerts the user that
important literature concerning the
operation and maintenance of this
unit has been included. Therefore, it
should be read carefully to avoid any
problems.
The liquid crystal display (LCD) panel is
made by highly precise technology. More
than 99.99% of its picture elements (pixels)
are effective, but some (less than 0.01%)
may appear as colored bright dots. This
does not indicate a fault as the LCD panel
stretches the limits of current technology.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
CAUTION
This product contains a laser diode of
higher class than 1. To ensure continued
safety, do not remove any covers or attempt
to gain access to the inside of the product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.

3
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP and Windows Vista® are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Intel® and Pentium® Processor are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
Intel® Core™ is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of Apple, Inc.
IBM® and PC/AT® are registered trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
SD logo is a trademark.
Other company names and product names listed are trademarks or brand names
belonging to each individual company.
Warning: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution to the user: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

4
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1Read these instructions.
2Keep these instructions.
3Heed all warnings.
4Follow all instructions.
5Do not use this apparatus near water.
6Clean only with dry cloth.
7Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has
two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided
plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long
periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has
been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
15 Do not drip or splash liquids onto the camcorder or place the camcorder near objects filled with
liquid such as vases.
16 Use the equipment (AC adapter/Charger) near a power outlet with easy accessibility.
17 Do not cover the camcorder with a cloth while using nor use the camcorder in a ill-ventilated
space such as in a box or bookcase.

5
Important Information ............................ 2
For Your Safety ...................................... 2
Precautions.............................................. 2
IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS ............................... 4
This camcorder makes all of the following
possible! .......................................................... 8
Choosing a disc to suit your purpose .............. 9
How to Read this Instruction Manual................... 9
Before Using the Product
- Be sure to read this information - ............... 11
Checking Provided Accessories ......................... 13
Names of Parts.................................................... 14
How to Open and Use the LCD Monitor ........... 19
How to Change the LCD Brightness .................. 20
Preparing ............................................................ 21
Setting up the battery pack............................ 21
Turning on the Power.................................... 22
Changing the display language ..................... 22
Setting the date and time............................... 23
Recording Movies to the HDD........................... 24
Recording Movies to a DVD.............................. 25
Recording Stills to an SD card ........................... 27
Playing Recorded Movies/Stills ......................... 28
Deleting Recorded Movies/Stills........................ 29
About HDD/DVD ......................................... 31
About cards ................................................... 33
Cautions for discs and cards.......................... 33
Inserting a DVD............................................ 34
When loading a new DVD-RW/+RW .......... 36
CHARGE lamp status and charging time ..... 37
Recording time with a fully charged battery. 37
Connecting the camcorder to a wall outlet.... 38
Detaching the DC power cord/battery pack from
the camcorder .......................................... 38
Efficient Use of the Battery .......................... 39
Recording Movies .............................................. 40
Using the Quick Start function ..................... 41
Information Display During Recording........ 42
Recording Still Pictures...................................... 45
Playback (Watching Your Recordings).............. 47
Playing back the last recorded scene ............ 47
Deleting the last recorded scene ................... 48
Choosing and playing back a scene .............. 48
Choosing and playing back multiple scenes . 49
Jumping to the designated scene................... 50
Adjusting speaker volume during movie
playback................................................... 52
Information Display During Playback.......... 52
Simple functions you can use during playback
or playback pause .................................... 54
Playing still pictures on a card automatically
(Slide Show) ........................................... 55
Capturing a still picture from a movie
(PHOTO Capture).................................... 56
Playing back scenes repeatedly
(Repeat Play) ........................................... 56
How to Operate the Menu .................................. 57
Menu (While Recording).................................... 58
How to use the LCD setup and initial setup . 60
About the demonstration function ................ 61
Magnified Recording
(Optical Zoom and Digital Zoom) ................ 62
Recording at Close Range (Macro Recording) .. 63
Using the Separately-Sold Lenses to Increase the
Wide-Angle or Telephoto Effect .................. 63
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus). 64
Adjusting the Brightness of the Image
(Exposure)..................................................... 66
Compensating for Backlight
(Backlight Compensation) ............................ 67
Selecting a Program AE Mode to Match the
Conditions (Program AE) ............................. 67
Adjusting the Color (White Balance)................. 68
Setting the white balance manually (Set)...... 70
Using the Electronic Image Stabilizer (EIS) ...... 71
Reducing Wind Noise During Recording .......... 71
Restoring all the Recording Settings to Default
(Full Auto) .................................................... 72
Tabl
Tabl
Tabl
TablTable of Content
e of Content
e of Content
e of Contente of Contents
s
s
ss
Introduction 8
Let’s Get Started 21
Functions and Characteristics of
HDD/DVD/Cards 30
Battery Pack 37
Recording 40
Viewing 47
Various Recording Techniques 57

6
Using the Flash .................................................. 72
Turning Off the Recording Indicator Beneath the
Lens .............................................................. 74
Changing the Movie Quality (VIDEO Mode) ... 75
Recording Movies for Wide-Screen TVs (16:9) 75
Changing Still Picture Quality (Quality) ........... 77
Inputting Audio and Video Signals From an
External Device (Input Source)
(DZ-HS903A)............................................... 78
Changing Capturing Still Picture Quality for
External Input (PHOTO Input)
(DZ-HS903A)............................................... 78
Using the Self-Timer ......................................... 79
First Dubbing (“New”) ...................................... 82
Dubbing All Scenes Recorded on the Same Day
(“Date”) ........................................................ 83
Dubbing All Scenes Recorded on the HDD
(“All”)........................................................... 84
Dubbing Scenes Selected (“Select”).................. 85
Displaying only Dubbed or Not Dubbed Scenes
(Category)..................................................... 86
Clearing the dub marks on Thumbnails
(MARK OFF)............................................... 86
Menu Items for the Disc Navigation ................. 88
Menu flows for the disc navigation .............. 90
Choosing Scenes by Program ............................ 92
Switching to the display arranged by program
(Program) ................................................ 92
Playing back a program (Play) ..................... 93
Renaming the title of a program (Title)........ 93
Playlist ............................................................... 95
What is “Playlist”? ....................................... 95
Creating a new Playlist (Create Playlist)...... 96
Displaying a desired Playlist (Playlist) ........ 97
Playing back a Playlist (Play)....................... 97
Adding scenes to a Playlist (Edit) ................ 98
Deleting scenes from Playlist (Edit)............. 99
Adding scenes using the Submenu for Editing
(Edit) ....................................................... 99
Deleting scenes using the Submenu for Editing
(Edit) ..................................................... 100
Selecting scenes using the Submenu for Editing
(Edit) ..................................................... 100
Arranging the order of scenes in the Playlist
(Edit) ..................................................... 101
Renaming the title of a Playlist (Title)....... 101
Deleting a Playlist (Delete) ........................ 102
Deleting Scenes (Edit – Delete)....................... 102
Dividing a Movie (Edit – Divide).................... 103
Combining Multiple Scenes (Edit – Combine) 105
Adding Special Effects (Edit –Fade) ............... 106
Skipping Scenes (Effect – Skip)..................... 107
Changing Thumbnail Image
(Effect – Thumbnail) ................................. 108
Go To ............................................................... 109
Copying still pictures on a DVD-RAM to the Card
(Copy)......................................................... 109
Locking Scenes on a Card (Lock) ................... 110
Displaying Information Using the Menu Screen
(Detail) ....................................................... 111
Formatting the HDD/DVD/CARD.................. 112
Protecting the HDD/DVD................................ 113
Checking the Remaining Recording Capacity on
the Medium (Capacity)............................... 114
Displaying Movies or Stills Independently
(Category)................................................... 114
Connecting to Your TV for Viewing............... 115
Connecting to a TV .................................... 115
Viewing on your TV .................................. 116
Setting the on-screen display output On/Off
(OSD Output)........................................ 116
Playing back wide-mode images on a 4:3 TV
(TV Type) ............................................. 117
Viewing on Other Players/Recorders .............. 118
About DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R Discs and
Finalization................................................. 118
About +RW Discs and Finalization................. 118
About DVD-RW (VR Mode) Discs and
Finalization................................................. 119
Playing back a DVD-RAM Disc on a DVD Player/
Recorder ..................................................... 119
Notes on Finalization....................................... 119
Finalizing a Disc .............................................. 120
Unfinalizing a Disc.......................................... 121
Dubbing from another A/V device
(DZ-HS903A) ....................................... 122
Dubbing from the camcorder to another A/V
device .................................................... 124
Dubbing on DVD 80
Editing 87
Viewing on the Other Devices 115
Dubbing With Another Audio/Video
(A/V) Device 122

7
Software installation ................................... 128
Preparation before importing images .......... 130
Connecting the camcorder to your PC using the
provided USB cable ............................... 130
How to remove/replace a DVD or remove a card
during the connection ............................ 132
Using a PC’s DVD drive to read a DVD
recorded on the camcorder .................... 133
Before terminating PC connection (removing
the USB cable) and changing the power
switch setting ......................................... 134
How to Use the Software.................................. 135
Uninstalling the software ............................ 145
Precautions When Connecting to a PC............. 145
Contact Information ......................................... 146
Optional Accessories ........................................ 147
Attaching the Shoulder Strap (Commercially
Available).................................................... 147
Error Messages ................................................. 148
Troubleshooting................................................ 157
Cautions on Use of this Product
- Be sure to read this information - ............. 167
System Reset .................................................... 172
Major Specifications......................................... 173
Glossary............................................................ 178
Index................................................................. 179
Be sure to read the following before opening the
package of CD-ROM .................................. 182
To Order in the United States........................... 183
Connecting to Your PC 125
Additional Information 147

8
New All
SelectDate
EXIT
Dubbing the scene which
isn't dubbed in HDD.
D ub b i ng M e nu
ENTER
This ca
This ca
This ca
This caThis camcorder ma
mcorder ma
mcorder ma
mcorder mamcorder makes all o
kes all o
kes all o
kes all okes all of the fol
f the fol
f the fol
f the folf the following
lowing
lowing
lowing lowing
possi
possi
possi
possipossible
ble
ble
bleble!
!
!
!!
Stills Movies Various media
HDD
DVD
SD card
After recording
After Watching
View on the TV
DVD-RAM/
DVD-RW/
DVD-R
+RW
AV Cable
S Cable
View on the
LCD monitor

9
This Instruction Manual is intended for the DZ-HS903A and DZ-HS803A
models. The following table shows the differences between the two models.
Use the cursor d c f e/ / / to select the items that appear on the LCD
screen. This manual indicates the cursor operations using the symbol
For details on how to operate the cursor, see "How to Operate the Menu" (p.57).
How to Rea
How to Rea
How to Rea
How to ReaHow to Read this Instru
d this Instru
d this Instru
d this Instrud this Instruction Ma
ction Ma
ction Ma
ction Maction Manual
nual
nual
nualnual
DZ-HS903A DZ-HS803A
HDD (Hard Disk Drive) Capacity Approx. 30 GB Approx. 8 GB
Maximum movie recording time Approx. 11 hours
(FINE mode)
Approx. 3 hours
(FINE mode)
External input function Equipped Not equipped
Do you want to delete/edit images
using this camcorder?
Do you want to reuse the disc?
Re-recordable One-time
recording
Playable on devices that are
compatible with 8 cm DVD-RAM
or 8 cm DVD-RW (VR mode)
accordingly.
* For details, refer to the standards
stated in "Recording format" (p.174).
Playable on most other DVD
players/recorders once they are
finalized after recording.
* For details, refer to the standards
stated in "Recording format" (p.174).
Do you want to play the disc
on a DVD player/recorder?
Re-recordable

10
The camcorder functions available vary depending on the media (HDD/DVD/
Card) used. Refer to the icon headings shown below to determine whether the
function explained complies with the media in use.
The display messages are omitted in this manual. Please use the LCD display of
your camcorder to check the messages.
H
H
H
HHD
D
D
DDD
D
D
DD
+RW
R
R
R
RR
A
A
A
AAM
M
M
MM
-R
-R
-R
-R-RW
W
W
WW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR)
R)
R)
R)R) R
R
R
RR
-R
-R
-R
-R-RW
W
W
WW (V
(V
(V
(V (VF)
F)
F)
F)F) CA
CA
CA
CACAR
R
R
RRD
D
D
DD
Collective
term Icon Media
HDD Built-in hard disk drive (HDD)
DVD
DVD-RAM
DVD-RW (VR mode)
DVD-RW (VF (Video) mode)
DVD-R
+RW
Card
SD memory card
miniSD memory card (exclusive adapter required)
microSD memory card (exclusive adapter required)
C
C
C
C
CA
A
A
AAR
R
R
RRD
D
D
DD

11
Conduct test recording.
• Before recording important shots, always conduct test recording to confirm that images
are normally recorded.
Recording surface
• Single-sided disc: unlabeled side.
• Double-sided disc: both sides.
How to hold a disc
For correct recording
• Do not touch the recording surface of a disc.
• Check that a disc recording surface is not dirty or
scratched.
• If the recording surface is dirty, wipe it clean using a
soft cloth.
Caution on disc loading
• Never touch the pickup.
Caution on vibrations and impacts
• While the ACCESS/PC indicator (p.14) is lit, do not
subject the camcorder to strong vibrations or impacts.
Caution should be particularly observed while the indicator
remains lit for a while after the end of recording.
About DVD
• We recommend using Hitachi Maxell brand discs. The
compatibility of the discs with this camcorder is
confirmed.
• If there is concern that the camcorder may be subjected to large vibrations or impact
during transport, remove the DVD and protect the camcorder using soft protective
materials.
Befo
Befo
Befo
BefoBefore Usi
re Usi
re Usi
re Usire Using the P
ng the P
ng the P
ng the Png the Product
roduct
roduct
roductroduct
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read- Be sure to read this information -
this information -
this information -
this information - this information -
Single-sided disc Double-sided disc
Labeled side
Recording side
Recording side
Recording side
Use a soft cloth and gently
wipe the disc surface from
the inner to the outer region.
pickup

12
Using DVD with other equipment
• We cannot guarantee that playback is possible on all types of recorders/players.
• Playback may not be possible depending on the model of the playback device or
recording status of the disc.
• When a DVD-RW/DVD-R recorded with this camcorder is used on another device,
always finalize the disc (p.120) using the camcorder in advance.
Hitachi will not compensate for recorded images.
• Hitachi cannot compensate for any damages caused when recording is not made
normally or recorded contents cannot be played back because of a defect in the
camcorder, disc or card. Also, Hitachi cannot be responsible for your recorded video
and audio.
• If you or a third party make a mistake when handling this camcorder, disc, card, etc.,
the recorded contents may be lost. We cannot be responsible for compensation for
damage due to loss of recorded contents.
• In the event that your camcorder is sent for repair, whether repair is successful or not,
recorded content may be lost. Hitachi cannot be held responsible for any lost data.
Copyright
• Be aware that recording is restricted for some demonstrations, performances and
exhibitions, even for personal enjoyment.

13
Make sure the following accessories are included in the package.
Checking
Checking
Checking
CheckingChecking Provide
Provide
Provide
Provide Provided Accesso
d Accesso
d Accesso
d Accessod Accessories
ries
ries
riesries
Battery pack (DZ-BP14S)
Portable power supply for your
new Hitachi Camcorder. Be
sure to fully charge the battery
before use.
AC adapter/charger
(DZ-ACS3)
Use to power the camcorder
from an AC power outlet, and
to charge the battery.
DC power cord
To power the camcorder from
an AC outlet, use this cord to
connect the AC adapter/
charger to the camcorder.
Remote control
(DZ-RM4W)
Use to control the camcorder
from a distance.
Lithium battery (CR2032)
To power the remote control.
WARNING
Keep this battery away from
children. If swallowed, consult
a physician immediately for
emergency treatment.
Power cable
Connects the AC adapter/
charger to the AC outlet.
AV/S cable
Use this cable to view images
from the camcorder on a TV.
The DZ-HS903A can input
audio and video signals from
external AV devices using this
cable. (However, note that the
S-Video connector is for
output signals only.)
The DZ-HS803A has no
external input function.
Lens cap and lens cap
string
Attach the lens cap when not
recording, to protect the lens.
Software CD-ROM and
USB cable
Install the software on the CD-
ROM onto your PC, then
connect the camcorder to the
PC using the USB cable.

14
Names of
Names of
Names of
Names ofNames of Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts Parts
QUICK START button (p.41)
ACCESS/PC indicator (p.11)
PHOTO/SELECT button
(p.27, 47)
DISC EJECT switch (p.25)
Disc compartment (p.25)
Battery platform (p.21)
Battery eject switch (PUSH)
(p.38)
Record button (p.25)
Lock switch (p.22)
When the power switch is set to
“HDD”, set the LOCK switch to the
upper position to prevent
accidentally moving the power
switch to “DVD”.
When the power switch is set to
“DVD”, the LOCK switch cannot
be moved.
Power switch (p.22)
Hand strap (p.18)

15
(Disc Navigation) button
(p.28)
MENU button (p.23)
DUBBING button (p.82)
C
C
C
CC (stop/exit) button (p.47)
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc/ / / (cursor)/
A
A
A
AA (confirmation) buttons
Used to choose scenes (movies and
stills), select menu items and
confirm, play/pause, or manually
adjust exposure/focus.
Speaker
RESET button (p.172)
FULL AUTO button (p.72)
DISPLAY button
(p.42, 48-49, 52)
CARD ACCESS indicator
Tripod receptacle
Used to attach the camcorder to a
tripod.
Card slot (p.27)
QUICK MENU button (p.57)
Used to display only basic menu
items
LCD BRIGHTNESS button
(p.20)
BLC button (p.67)
Bottom

16
Light receiving sensor
Used to control flash amount.
Do not block the light receiving
sensor with your hand when
recording still pictures.
Flash (p.72)
Optical 10x zoom lens (p.62)
Zoom lever/volume (p.52, 62, 64)
USB terminal (p.131)
A/V terminal (p.115)
Stereo microphone
Do not block the microphone with
your hand during recording.
Remote control receiver
Recording indicator (p.40)
LCD monitor (color wide-screen)
Inside the
cover

17
PHOTO
REC DISPLAY
DIGITAL ZOOM
MENU
SELECT
DELET E
DISC
NAVIGATION
ZOOM
PHOTO button (p.27)
REC button (p.24)
MENU button (p.23)
SELECT button (p.47)
d
d
d
dd (reverse search) button (p.54)
DELETE button (p.102)
DISC NAVIGATION button
(p.28)
* Functions the same as .
DISPLAY button (p.42)
ZOOM T button (p.62)
DIGITAL ZOOM button (p.62)
ZOOM W button (p.62)
f
f
f
ff (reverse skip) button (p.54)
c
c
c
cc (forward search) button
(p.54)
Confirmation button (p.28)
C
C
C
CC (stop/cancel) button (p.47)
e
e
e
ee (forward skip) button (p.54)
While inserting a thin
tipped instrument
(paperclip, etc.) into the
hole marked PUSH,
swing the battery holder
arm out.
Insert the lithium
battery with the
positive (+) terminal
facing down.
Slide the cover to
close it.
* For instructions on handling batteries, see p.18.
Battery holder

18
Fasten the hand strap according to the procedure in the diagram.
Tie the lens cap to the hand strap using the string (all supplied).
BATTERY MAY EXPLODE IF NOT HANDLED PROPERLY. DO NOT
RECHARGE, DISASSEMBLE, OR DISPOSE OF IN FIRE.
Replace the battery with a Hitachi Maxell, Sony, Panasonic, Sanyo, Toshiba
CR2032, or Duracell DL2032. Use of another battery may present a risk of
fire or explosion.
small loop
• To protect the lens, attach the lens cap to the lens when you are not using
the camcorder.
• Wipe the lens using a soft dry cloth if the lens gets dirty.

19
• If the LCD monitor is hard to see while recording in bright outdoor conditions,
adjust the LCD brightness (p.20).
How to Op
How to Op
How to Op
How to OpHow to Open and Us
en and Us
en and Us
en and Usen and Use the LCD M
e the LCD M
e the LCD M
e the LCD Me the LCD Monitor
onitor
onitor
onitoronitor
To record yourself
(p.20)
When playing back, etc.
Recording high
places above your
line of sight
Effortlessly record
small children or pets
at their line of sight
Basic posture
Hold the camcorder with
both hands and tuck your
elbows to your chest or
sides, and move the
camcorder at a gentle pace.
This will allow you to
record effectively without
blurring.
You can use the LCD monitor as follows.

20
• The LCD monitor displays a mirror image of the subject.
• The remaining battery charge indicator will only appear when battery power is
almost gone. The battery charge indicator flashes red in this case.
• A warning message will not be displayed (p.148). You can confirm the
warning message by rotating the LCD monitor 180° back to its normal
orientation.
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor when it is too dark or too bright
to see the image on display.
The brightness changes every time you press LCD BRIGHTNESS. There are
three settings available.
At time of purchase of this camcorder, the brightness is set to the brightest.
The LCD brightness setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned
off. However, if the camcorder is turned on while being powered from an AC
power outlet, the LCD brightness setting will be reset to the brightest.
How to
How to
How to
How toHow to Chang
Chang
Chang
Chang Change the
e the
e the
e thee the LCD Br
LCD Br
LCD Br
LCD Br LCD Bright
ight
ight
ightightness
ness
ness
nessness

21
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Preparing
Setting up the battery pack
Connect the pow
Connect the pow
Connect the pow
Connect the powConnect the power cable to the AC adapter/cha
er cable to the AC adapter/cha
er cable to the AC adapter/cha
er cable to the AC adapter/chaer cable to the AC adapter/charger.
rger.
rger.
rger.rger.
Plug in the power c
Plug in the power c
Plug in the power c
Plug in the power cPlug in the power cable to a wall outlet.
able to a wall outlet.
able to a wall outlet.
able to a wall outlet.able to a wall outlet.
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery pAttach the battery pack to the AC adapter/charger.
ack to the AC adapter/charger.
ack to the AC adapter/charger.
ack to the AC adapter/charger.ack to the AC adapter/charger.
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery p
Attach the battery pAttach the battery pack to the camcorder.
ack to the camcorder.
ack to the camcorder.
ack to the camcorder.ack to the camcorder.
z Charge status of the battery pack
The CHARGE indicator of the AC adapter/charger allows you to check on the
charge status of the battery pack.
Charge Status CHARGE indicator
During charge lit * For details on charging time,
see p.37.
Charge complete Unlit
Note
Charging will not occur if the DC power
cord is connected.
Terminal at
bottom
If the CHARGE indicator does not light,
check that the connections ( , , )
are firmly connected.
CHARGE indicator
Notes
• Charge battery pack in temperatures above +50ºF (10ºC) and below +86ºF
(30ºC).
• Use only the AC adapter/charger which accompanied your camcorder or
direct replacement as listed in this manual.
Let’s Get Started

22
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Turning on the Power
1
1
1
11 Turn on th
Turn on th
Turn on th
Turn on thTurn on the power.
e power.
e power.
e power.e power.
2
2
2
22 Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.Open the LCD monitor.
Changing the display language
You can change the language used on screens and menus as follows.
Press
Press
Press
Press Press MENU, then select “Initial Setu
, then select “Initial Setu
, then select “Initial Setu
, then select “Initial Setu, then select “Initial Setup” by pressing
p” by pressing
p” by pressing
p” by pressing p” by pressing f e
/
/
/
// .
.
.
..
Then press
Then press
Then press
Then press Then press c (or the confi
(or the confi
(or the confi
(or the confi (or the confirmation button).
rmation button).
rmation button).
rmation button).rmation button).
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
Press and hol
Press and hol
Press and hol
Press and holPress and hold the gray button, and turn t
d the gray button, and turn t
d the gray button, and turn t
d the gray button, and turn td the gray button, and turn the power switch to “HDD
he power switch to “HDD
he power switch to “HDD
he power switch to “HDDhe power switch to “HDD”, “DVD”, or “SD”.
”, “DVD”, or “SD”.
”, “DVD”, or “SD”.
”, “DVD”, or “SD”.”, “DVD”, or “SD”.
* You do not need press the gray button
when you turn off the switch or switch
between “HDD” and “DVD”.
A (Confirmation button)

23
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Select “Language” by p
Select “Language” by p
Select “Language” by p
Select “Language” by pSelect “Language” by pressing
ressing
ressing
ressing ressing f e
/
/
/
// , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press c (or
(or
(or
(or (or the
the
the
thethe con
con
con
con confirm
firm
firm
firmfirmati
ati
ati
atiation
on
on
on on
button).
button).
button).
button).button).
Choose the desi
Choose the desi
Choose the desi
Choose the desiChoose the desired language by pressin
red language by pressin
red language by pressin
red language by pressinred language by pressing
g
g
g g d c
/
/
/
// , then
, then
, then
, then, then press the confirmation
press the confirmation
press the confirmation
press the confirmation press the confirmation
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
Setting the date and time
Press
Press
Press
Press Press MENU, then select “Date Setup” by pressing
, then select “Date Setup” by pressing
, then select “Date Setup” by pressing
, then select “Date Setup” by pressing , then select “Date Setup” by pressing f/
/
/
// .
.
.
..e
Then press
Then press
Then press
Then press Then press c to select “Date Set” and press
to select “Date Set” and press
to select “Date Set” and press
to select “Date Set” and press to select “Date Set” and press c again
again
again
again again.
.
.
..
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.irmation button.
The confirmation screen appears.
L a n gu ag e En g l i s h
Au t o
ENTER RETURN
O f f
On
On
P o w e r S a v e
Be e p
Demo Mode
R e s e t
R e c o r d L ED
I n i t i a l S e t u p
Select each item by pressing
Select each item by pressing
Select each item by pressing
Select each item by pressing Select each item by pressing d c
/
/
/
// an
an
an
an and
d
d
d d
set the correct value by pressi
set the correct value by pressi
set the correct value by pressi
set the correct value by pressiset the correct value by pressing
ng
ng
ng ng f e
/
/
/
// .
.
.
..
• Repeat this step until year, month,
date, hour, minute, and AM/PM are
correctly set.
Press
Press
Press
Press Press d
d
d
dd to select “YES”, then p
to select “YES”, then p
to select “YES”, then p
to select “YES”, then p to select “YES”, then press the
ress the
ress the
ress the ress the
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmaticonfirmation button to confir
on button to confir
on button to confir
on button to confiron button to confirm.
m.
m.
m.m.
• If you select “NO” and press e
e
e
ee, the
screen returns to step .

24
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Recording Movies to the HDD
1
1
1
11 Turn the po
Turn the po
Turn the po
Turn the poTurn the power switch to “HD
wer switch to “HD
wer switch to “HD
wer switch to “HDwer switch to “HDD”.
D”.
D”.
D”.D”.
2
2
2
22 Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the record bu
he record bu
he record bu
he record buhe record button.
tton.
tton.
tton.tton.
Recording begins.
To pause recording, press the record button again.
* You can change the movie recording quality (p.75).

25
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Recording Movies to a DVD
1
1
1
11 Ins
Ins
Ins
InsInsert a DVD.
ert a DVD.
ert a DVD.
ert a DVD.ert a DVD.
Attach the charged battery pack.
Place the recording surface of the DVD face
down. (For a single-sided disc, the side
opposite the label is the recording surface.)
When handling a disc:
Do not touch the recording surface
of a disc (p.11).

26
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
2
2
2
22 Turn the po
Turn the po
Turn the po
Turn the poTurn the power switch to “DV
wer switch to “DV
wer switch to “DV
wer switch to “DVwer switch to “DVD”.
D”.
D”.
D”.D”.
3
3
3
33 Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the record bu
he record bu
he record bu
he record buhe record button.
tton.
tton.
tton.tton.
Recording begins.
To pause recording, press the record button again.
Hint
If the format confirmation screen appears after loading a new DVD-RW/+RW,
format the disc as guided through the LCD screens (p.36). Formatting is not
necessary when recording on a DVD-RAM/DVD-R.

27
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
PHOTO/SELECT
Press
Press
Press
Press Press PHOTO/SELECT half
half
half
half halfway down so that a subj
way down so that a subj
way down so that a subj
way down so that a subjway down so that a subject in the center of the
ect in the center of the
ect in the center of the
ect in the center of the ect in the center of the
screen is focused.
screen is focused.
screen is focused.
screen is focused.screen is focused.
Fully p
Fully p
Fully p
Fully pFully press
ress
ress
ress ress PHOTO/SELECT to record.
to record.
to record.
to record. to record.
Single press of the
Single press of the
Single press of the
Single press of the Single press of the PHOTO/SELECT b
b
b
b button of the remote control enabl
utton of the remote control enabl
utton of the remote control enabl
utton of the remote control enablutton of the remote control enables
es
es
es es
focusing and record
focusing and record
focusing and record
focusing and recordfocusing and recording at the same time.
ing at the same time.
ing at the same time.
ing at the same time.ing at the same time.
For usable card types, see p.33.
Pay attention to the orientation of the card.
Face up the label side.

28
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
See p.115 for the instructions on viewing the recordings on your TV screen.
0 01 / 014A l l P r og r a
m
s
PLAY SELECT
PHOTO

29
Let’
Let’
Let’
Let’Let’s Get St
s Get St
s Get St
s Get Sts Get Started
arted
arted
artedarted
Deleting Recorded Movies/Stills
1
1
1
11 Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22 Select a scene you want to delete, then press
Select a scene you want to delete, then press
Select a scene you want to delete, then press
Select a scene you want to delete, then press Select a scene you want to delete, then press MENU.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33 Select “Scene”
Select “Scene”
Select “Scene”
Select “Scene” Select “Scene” “Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit” “Edit” “Delete”, and
“Delete”, and
“Delete”, and
“Delete”, and “Delete”, and then press
then press
then press
then press then press
the confirm
the confirm
the confirm
the confirmthe confirmation button
ation button
ation button
ation buttonation button.
.
.
..
4
4
4
44 Select “YES”, th
Select “YES”, th
Select “YES”, th
Select “YES”, thSelect “YES”, then press the confirma
en press the confirma
en press the confirma
en press the confirmaen press the confirmation button.
tion button.
tion button.
tion button.tion button.
The selected scene is deleted.
y
Scenes on DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW discs cannot be deleted.
y
On +RW, you can delete only the last recorded scene (p.48).
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 43, 4
0 01 / 014A l l P r og r a
m
s
PLAY SELECT
PHOTO

30
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
The following table lists the storage media (discs and cards) and available
functions that can be used with this camcorder.
Function
●: Functions available
—: Not available
Media
Built-in
HDD
DVD-
RAM
DVD-RW
(VR mode)
DVD-RW
(VF mode) DVD-R +RW
SD
card
Recording movies
(p.40)
● ● ● ● ● ● —
Recording stills (p.45) — — — — — — ●
Deleting recordings
(p.102) ● ● ● — — ● *1 ●
Editing recordings (p.87) ● ● ● — — — —
Playing on other DVD
players/recorders (p.118) — ●*2 ●*2 *3 ●*3 ●*3 ●*2 *3 —
Initializing and reusing
(p.112) ● ● ● ● — ● ●
Making additional
recordings after a disc is
finalized (p.121)
●*4 ●*4 ● ● *5 — ● *5 ●*4
Copying recordings onto
a PC (p.125) ●*6 ●*6 ●*6 *7 ●*6 *7 ●*6 *7 ●*6 *7 ●
Making DVD video discs
using a PC — ● *6 *8 ●*6 *8 ●*6 *9 ●*6 *9 — —
*
1 Only the last recorded scene can be deleted (p.48).
*
2 Not playable on some devices.
Playback is possible using a device which complies with the medium type.
*
3 Must be finalized. Not playable on some devices.
*
4 As finalizing is unnecessary (cannot be performed), additional recordings are possible at any time.
*
5 To make additional recordings, the finalized disc must be unfinalized.
*
6 The provided software is used.
*
7 Finalize the disc to edit on a PC.
*
8 A DVD-VR disc can be created.
*
9 A DVD video disc can be created.
Functions and Characteristics of HDD/DVD/Cards

31
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
About HDD/DVD
* The versions in the above chart refer to physical standard versions of discs.
Usable discs and their logos Function
HDD
Allows extensive movie recordings.
DZ-HS903A: approx. 11 hours in FINE mode
DZ-HS803A: approx. 3 hours in FINE mode
Allows editing and deleting scenes.
DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1 (8 cm)
Allows editing and deleting scenes.
DVD-RW 2x Ver. 1.1 (8 cm)
Allows editing and deleting scenes using the
camcorder in VR mode.
Does not allow editing or deleting scenes using the
camcorder in VF mode, but provides higher
compatibility with other DVD players.
DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0
(8 cm)
Provides compatibility with most DVD players.
Does not allow editing and deleting scenes.
+RW Ver. 1.2 (8 cm)
Provides high compatibility with other DVD players
and does not need to be finalized.
Scenes can be deleted immediately after being
recorded.

32
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
Notes
• Hitachi Maxell single sided discs (HG type) have been confirmed to be
compatible with this camcorder and are recommended. Take care not to
dirty (including fingerprints) or scratch the surface of the discs when
handling.
When using a double-sided disc, take great care with handling it. Using
non-Hitachi Maxell discs may not allow the camcorder to deliver optimum
performance.
• DVD housed in a square cartridge/caddy case or a round DVD holder
cannot be used as is. The DVD must be removed from its case/holder
before it can be used.
Note on DVD-R
This camcorder writes control data to a disc in order to automatically make
recording adjustments when first recording after:
• a disc is inserted, and
• the power is turned on while the disc is in the camcorder.
If there is not enough space on the control area of a disc, recording may not
be possible even if the data space for recording movies is not full. To prevent
this, avoid performing operations described above more than 99 times per
disc.
Unusable Discs
Dual layer DVD discs, Blu-ray disc, +R, and HD-DVD.

33
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
About cards
z
z
z
zzCard Handling
• Do not use cards other than those specified.
• Be sure to perform trial recording before recording important
images.
• Do not touch the card terminal or allow it to touch metal.
• Do not paste anything other than the designated label in the label
area.
• Do not subject cards to impact, bending, or dropping.
• Do not disassemble or modify a card.
• Do not expose cards to water.
• Do not use or store cards in the following places:
− Where the temperature is high, such as in a vehicle in the sun or near a heater
− Where humidity is high, or in a dusty place
• When the erasure prevention
switch is locked, recording,
deletion, and editing are not
allowed. Only playback is
possible.
Cautions for discs and cards
To prevent data loss or damage:
• Do not remove the battery and card while reading or writing data.
• Do not use the camcorder in a place subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
• Do not leave a disc unused in the camcorder for an extended period of long time.
Terminal
Erasure prevention
switch
Locked status
Notes
• Only 1 GB or less capacity SD memory cards can be used.
(2GB SD memory cards cannot be used with this camcorder.)
• When using an exclusive adapter, a miniSD memory card and micro SD
memory card can be used in the same way as an SD memory card. No
SDHC card or multimedia card can be used.

34
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
Inserting a DVD
Close the lid.
Close the lid.
Close the lid.
Close the lid.Close the lid.
The ACCESS/PC indicator flashes. During this process, do not remove the
power source, shake, or subject the camcorder to impacts.
When a new DVD-R
When a new DVD-R
When a new DVD-R
When a new DVD-RWhen a new DVD-RW or +RW is inserted, see p.36.
W or +RW is inserted, see p.36.
W or +RW is inserted, see p.36.
W or +RW is inserted, see p.36.W or +RW is inserted, see p.36.
Attach the charged b
Attach the charged b
Attach the charged b
Attach the charged bAttach the charged battery pack to
attery pack to
attery pack to
attery pack to attery pack to
the camcorder or connec
the camcorder or connec
the camcorder or connec
the camcorder or connecthe camcorder or connect the
t the
t the
t the t the
camcorder to a wall ou
camcorder to a wall ou
camcorder to a wall ou
camcorder to a wall oucamcorder to a wall outlet.
tlet.
tlet.
tlet.tlet.
Turn the power switch
Turn the power switch
Turn the power switch
Turn the power switchTurn the power switch to “OFF”.
to “OFF”.
to “OFF”.
to “OFF”. to “OFF”.
Then, press down
Then, press down
Then, press down
Then, press downThen, press down the
the
the
the the DISC
EJECT switch until the ACCESS/
switch until the ACCESS/
switch until the ACCESS/
switch until the ACCESS/ switch until the ACCESS/
PC indicator lights
PC indicator lights
PC indicator lights
PC indicator lightsPC indicator lights, then release.
, then release.
, then release.
, then release., then release.
After several s
After several s
After several s
After several sAfter several seconds, the lid pops
econds, the lid pops
econds, the lid pops
econds, the lid popseconds, the lid pops
open. Open it fully with your hand.
open. Open it fully with your hand.
open. Open it fully with your hand.
open. Open it fully with your hand.open. Open it fully with your hand.
Place the recording surf
Place the recording surf
Place the recording surf
Place the recording surfPlace the recording surface of the DVD
ace of the DVD
ace of the DVD
ace of the DVD ace of the DVD
face down, then p
face down, then p
face down, then p
face down, then pface down, then push down on the
ush down on the
ush down on the
ush down on the ush down on the
center of the DVD unt
center of the DVD unt
center of the DVD unt
center of the DVD untcenter of the DVD until it clicks in
il it clicks in
il it clicks in
il it clicks inil it clicks into
to
to
to to
plac
plac
plac
placplace.
e.
e.
e.e.
• For single-sided discs, the side
opposite the label is the
recording surface.
• To record on the other side for
double-sided discs, remove the
disc (p.35), flip it over, and
reload it.

35
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
Removing the disc
Pressing slightly on the center hub with
a finger, grip the edge of the disc by
your thumb and lift the disc out as
shown.
Notes
• The disc mechanism will be very hot immediately after use. Do not touch
the metallic areas.
• Do not peer into the pickup. Doing so may cause
damage to your eyesight.
• To prevent malfunction, never do any of the
following:
– touch the pickup
– insert a disc that is not compatible with the
camcorder (p.31, 32)
– close the lid before setting the disc securely into
place
• The power automatically turns off if the lid is left open for approx. three
minutes.
• The lid will not open if the camcorder is not connected to a power source.
Pickup

36
Functions an
Functions an
Functions an
Functions anFunctions and Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics o
d Characteristics od Characteristics of HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/
f HDD/DVD/f HDD/DVD/Cards
Cards
Cards
CardsCards
When loading a new DVD-RW/+RW
The disc must be formatted before it can be used for recording. When the disc is
loaded, the format confirmation screen will appear in the LCD monitor. Format
the disc according to the procedure below.
Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.
Open the LCD monitor.Open the LCD monitor.
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing Select “YES” by pressing d
d
d
dd, then press the conf
, then press the conf
, then press the conf
, then press the conf, then press the confirmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.irmation button.
(When usi
(When usi
(When usi
(When usi(When using a DVD-RW
ng a DVD-RW
ng a DVD-RW
ng a DVD-RWng a DVD-RW)
)
)
))
The recording format selection screen appears.
Select “VR Mode” or “VF Mode” by pressing d
d
d
dd
/
c
c
c
cc, then press the
confirmation button.
Note
Be careful that the power is not
accidentally cut off during formatting.
Otherwise, the disc will become unusable.
A
A
A
AA (confirmation button)
d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc/
ENTER
Format DVD
YES NO
DVD is not formatted.
Format the DVD now?
When using a DVD-RW
Proceed to step .
When using a +RW
Formatting will start. Skip step .
ENTER
Format DVD
VR Mode VF Mode
DVD Format.
Select record format.
VR Mode
After recording, you can perform
various editing functions such as
choosing and deleting scenes.
You can play back the disc in a device
which supports 8 cm DVD-RW (VR
Mode) after finalizing the disc.
VF Mode (Video mode)
Although editing cannot be done on the
camcorder, you can play back the disc
on other DVD devices after finalizing
the disc.

37
Battery P
Battery P
Battery P
Battery PBattery Pack
ack
ack
ackack
CHARGE lamp status and charging time
Recording time with a fully charged battery
Use the following table to estimate continuous recording times (minutes) using a
fully charged battery pack.
* Recordable time when zoom, focus, and switch changes are operated.
Battery
type
Continuous recording
( )with max LCD brightness Normal use*
( )with max LCD brightness
Video mode XTRA S A S/FINE TD XTR /FINE TD
Recording
media HDD DVD HDD DVD HDD DVD HDD DVD
DZ-BP14S (provided)
DZ-BP14SW
(separately sold) 110 95 110 105 55 45 55 50
DZ-BP21SW
(separately sold) 165 140 165 155 80 70 80 75
Lights Charging
Goes out Charge
Complete
Blinks See "Troubleshooting" (p.157).
Approx. charging time
(at approx. 77°F (25°C))
DZ-BP14S (provided) 165 mins
DZ-BP14SW (separately sold)
DZ-BP21SW
(separately sold)
235 mins
Notes
• In low temperature environments, recording time will be shortened.
• The times indicated in the table are estimates, and will change depending
on actual recording conditions.
Battery Pack

38
Battery P
Battery P
Battery P
Battery PBattery Pack
ack
ack
ackack
Connecting the camcorder to a wall outlet
Detaching the DC power cord/battery pack from
the camcorder
To wall outlet
To wall outlet
To wall outlet
To wall outletTo wall outlet
Connect to th
Connect to th
Connect to th
Connect to thConnect to the AC adapter/charger.
e AC adapter/charger.
e AC adapter/charger.
e AC adapter/charger.e AC adapter/charger.
Connect to the AC adap
Connect to the AC adap
Connect to the AC adap
Connect to the AC adapConnect to the AC adapter/
ter/
ter/
ter/ter/
charger.
charger.
charger.
charger.charger.
Power cable
Power cable
Power cable
Power cablePower cable
Connect to the
Connect to the
Connect to the
Connect to the Connect to the
camcorder.
camcorder.
camcorder.
camcorder.camcorder. DC power c
DC power c
DC power c
DC power cDC power cord
ord
ord
ordord
Notes
• The battery pack will not be charged while the DC power cord is connected
to the AC adapter/charger even if the battery pack is attached to the AC
adapter/charger.
• The AC adapter/charger can be used around the world. An AC plug adapter
is required in some foreign countries. If you need one, purchase it from
your local electronics distributor.
AC 200-240V
AC Plug Adapter (not provided)
Always turn
Always turn
Always turn
Always turnAlways turn the power
the power
the power
the power the power off before
off before
off before
off before off before disconnecting
disconnecting
disconnecting
disconnecting disconnecting
the power suppl
the power suppl
the power suppl
the power supplthe power supply.
y.
y.
y.y.
While pressin
While pressin
While pressin
While pressinWhile pressing and holding
g and holding
g and holding
g and holding g and holding PUSH, slide the
, slide the
, slide the
, slide the, slide the
DC connector o
DC connector o
DC connector o
DC connector oDC connector or battery pack upwa
r battery pack upwa
r battery pack upwa
r battery pack upwar battery pack upward, then
rd, then
rd, then
rd, then rd, then
remove it.
remove it.
remove it.
remove it.remove it.
• Be careful not to drop the battery pack
while detaching it.

39
Battery P
Battery P
Battery P
Battery PBattery Pack
ack
ack
ackack
Efficient Use of the Battery
• The battery will slightly discharge even if it is detached from the camcorder.
• If the battery is left attached to the camcorder, it will consume a slight amount
of power. Therefore, it is recommended that you charge the battery a day
before using the camcorder.
When you intend not to use the camcorder for an extended period
of time
It is recommended that you fully charge the battery at least once every six months, attach
it to the camcorder, turn it on and fully deplete the battery charge, then remove the
battery and store it in a cool place.
Battery life
The battery life varies greatly depending on the ambient environment and how
often the camcorder is used. If the usable time of the camcorder with a fully
charged battery is noticeably short, the battery should be replaced. Purchase a
new one.
Power Save function
To save power, do not leave the camcorder in record pause mode for too long.
Even during record pause, battery power is consumed at about the same level as
during recording.
By turning the power save function On, the camcorder will automatically turn off
if left idle for approximately five minutes in record pause mode. For power save
function, see "How to use the LCD setup and initial setup" (p.60).

40
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Recording Movies
You can choose either HDD or DVD to record movies.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (VR
(VR
(VR
(VR (VR)
)
)
)) R
R
R
RR
-RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (VF
(VF
(VF
(VF (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Press and h
Press and h
Press and h
Press and hPress and hold the lock
old the lock
old the lock
old the lock old the lock
button, and turn
button, and turn
button, and turn
button, and turnbutton, and turn the power
the power
the power
the power the power
switc
switc
switc
switcswitch.
h.
h.
h.h.
3Press the reco
Press the reco
Press the reco
Press the recoPress the record button.
rd button.
rd button.
rd button.rd button.
• “
• “
• “
• “• “m
m
m
mm“(record paus
“(record paus
“(record paus
“(record paus“(record pause) in the LCD monitor wi
e) in the LCD monitor wi
e) in the LCD monitor wi
e) in the LCD monitor wie) in the LCD monitor will
ll
ll
ll ll
change to “
change to “
change to “
change to “change to “n
n
n
nn” and recording wi
” and recording wi
” and recording wi
” and recording wi” and recording will begin.
ll begin.
ll begin.
ll begin.ll begin.
•
•
•
•• The recording i
The recording i
The recording i
The recording iThe recording indicator beneath the lens will
ndicator beneath the lens will
ndicator beneath the lens will
ndicator beneath the lens willndicator beneath the lens will
also light up red.
also light up red.
also light up red.
also light up red. also light up red.
•
•
•
•• To pause record
To pause record
To pause record
To pause recordTo pause recordi
i
i
iing, press the rec
ng, press the rec
ng, press the rec
ng, press the recng, press the record button
ord button
ord button
ord button ord button
again. The elapsed recording
again. The elapsed recording
again. The elapsed recording
again. The elapsed recordingagain. The elapsed recording
time will reset to
time will reset to
time will reset to
time will reset to time will reset to
“0:00:00”.
“0:00:00”.
“0:00:00”.
“0:00:00”.“0:00:00”.
•
•
•
•• To resume rec
To resume rec
To resume rec
To resume recTo resume recording, press the rec
ording, press the rec
ording, press the rec
ording, press the recording, press the record button
ord button
ord button
ord button ord button
agai
agai
agai
agaiagain.
n.
n.
n.n.
1Turn the power swit
Turn the power swit
Turn the power swit
Turn the power switTurn the power switch to “HDD
ch to “HDD
ch to “HDD
ch to “HDDch to “HDD” or “
” or “
” or “
” or “” or “DVD”.
DVD”.
DVD”.
DVD”.DVD”.
2Open the LCD moni
Open the LCD moni
Open the LCD moni
Open the LCD moniOpen the LCD monitor.
tor.
tor.
tor.tor.
10:00 AM
12/ 1/2008
m
m
m
mm n
n
n
nn/
Remaining
battery level
Current time
Elapsed recording time
(hrs : mins : secs)
Remaining space on
HDD/DVD/Card
Recording

41
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Using the Quick Start
function
If you press QUICK START, the
camcorder enters sleep mode and will
keep battery consumption to a minimum
(approx. half of the power consumed
during recording) and you can restore record pause mode quickly (about one
second) by pressing QUICK START again.
During sleep mode, the QUICK START button lights blue.
Just press
QUICK START.
Hints
• For details on screen displays during recording, see p.42.
• You can change the movie recording quality (p.75).
• If you cannot record movies, the camcorder does not operate, or it takes too
long for recording to start, see “Troubleshooting” (p.157).
• About Sleep Mode
– You can also return to record pause mode from sleep mode by pressing
the record button (press again to start recording) or changing the media.
– When you return to record pause mode from sleep mode, the zoom
position (approx. 1.5×), manual focus, exposure, and backlight
compensation will return to their default settings (p.62, 64–67).
– Regardless of the power save setting (p.60), the camcorder power will
automatically turn off if standby in sleep mode continues for approx. 30
minutes. In this case, first turn the power switch to “OFF”, then turn it to
“HDD”/“DVD”.
Notes
• The ACCESS/PC indicator is flashing for a while even after you finish
recording. While the ACCESS/PC indicator is flashing, do not turn off the
power or shake the camcorder. Doing so may cause an error in the recorded
data and you may not be able to play back the data (p.170).
• The minimum recording time for movies is about three seconds (even if you
press the record button before three recording seconds have elapsed).
• It may not be possible to deactivate the protection on a DVD which was
protected using another device. In this case, use that same device to
deactivate the protection.

42
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Information Display During Recording
Switching the display mode
Various information will appear in the LCD monitor during recording.
You can choose simple display or detailed (all information) display by pressing
DISPLAY repeatedly.
On-Screen Information
See the next page for details.
1 0
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
3 0 MIN
0 : 0 0 : 0 0
REC
HDD ACCESS
REM
1 4
Scene
REM
VOLUME
FINE
FULL AUTO
L IN
* The above display is for explanation and different from the actual display.
Warnings/Messages
Current medium/
input mode
Current time/date
Zoom
16:9 mode Program AE Backlight
Compensation
EIS (Electronic
Image Stabilizer) White Balance
Microphone filter Flash
Self-timer
External Input
(DZ-HS903A)
Recording status
Movie recording time
Remaining space on
HDD/DVD/Card
Remaining number of
recordable scenes
(DZ-HS903A)
Remaining battery
level
FULL AUTO
indicator (p.72)
Volume
Exposure
Manual Focus
HDD/DVD/Card
type
Movie recording
quality

43
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Current medium/input mode
(p.24, 25, 27)
: “Input Source” is “CAMERA”
and in movie recording mode
(HDD/DVD)
: “Input Source” is “CAMERA”
and in still recording mode
(Card)
: “Input Source” is “LINE” and
“PHOTO input” mode (still
capture quality for a movie from
a connected external device) is
“Field”. (LINE) (DZ-HS903A)
: “Input Source” is “LINE” and
“PHOTO input” mode is
“Frame”. (LINE)
(DZ-HS903A)
16:9 mode
(p.75) (when using HDD/DVD)
No icon : Off
: On
Program AE
(p.67)
No icon : Auto
: Sports
: Portrait
: Spotlight
: Sand & Snow
: Low Light
Backlight Compensation
(p.67)
No icon : Off
: On
Electronic Image Stabilizer
(EIS) (p.71)
(when using HDD/DVD)
No icon : Off
: On
White Balance
(p.68)
No icon : Auto
: Set
: Outdoor
: Indoor1
: Indoor2
Microphone filter
(p.71)
(when using HDD/DVD)
No icon : Off
: On
Flash
(p.72) (when using Card)
No icon : Auto
: Flash On
: Flash Off
Self-timer
(p.79) (when using Card)
No icon : Off
: On
(Ten-second countdown)
External Input
(p.78) (DZ-HS903A)
L IN : AV input
Recording status
Recording
Record pause (lit green)
Focus is locked (lit purple when
using card (recording sills))
No icon
*1
Zoom
(p.62)
W
(Digital Zoom: Off)
X
(Digital Zoom: 40x)
Y
(Digital Zoom: 240x) (when using HDD/DVD)
Exposure
(p.66)
No gauge : Auto
: Manual
REC

44
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Manual Focus
(p.64)
No gauge : Auto
: Manual
Current medium and its status
(p.30)
(HDD/DVD/Card)
: HDD
: Protected HDD
: DVD-RAM
: Protected DVD-RAM
/ : DVD-RW (VR mode/VF mode)
: Protected DVD-RW (VR mode)
: Finalized DVD-RW (VR mode)
: Protected Finalized DVD-RW
(VR mode)
: Finalized DVD-RW (VF mode)
: DVD-R
: Finalized DVD-R
(finalized using this camcorder)
: DVD-R finalized using a device
other than the DZ-HS903A/
DZ-HS803A.
Or DVD-R recorded using a
HITACHI camcorder marketed
before the DZ-HS903A/
DZ-HS803A
: +RW
: Finalized +RW
: SD memory card
: Locked SD memory card
No icon
*2
Movie recording quality
(p.75)
(when using HDD/DVD)
XTRA : Best quality
FINE : High quality
STD : Extended recording
Still recording quality
(p.77)
(when using card)
FINE : High quality
NORM : Standard quality
ECO High quantity (lower quality)
Remaining space on HDD/DVD/Card
*3
REM XX MIN
*4
:
Remaining recordable time during movie
recording (HDD/DVD)
REM XX
*5
:
Number of remaining recordable still images
during stills recording (Card)
Remaining number of recordable scenes
*3
(when using HDD) (DZ-HS903A)
REM XX Scene
:
Will appear when the remaining number of
recordable scenes (999 scenes max.
*6
) is 50 or
less. If the number is down to 10 or less, the
display will be in purple.
Remaining battery level
(p.37)
Volume
Appears here when “Input Source” is set to
“LINE” (DZ-HS903A).
During playback, this indicator appears in a
different position of the LCD screen (p.52).
*1 No icon appears when:
• no disc or card is inserted.
• a disc not formatted is loaded.
• the HDD is protected or a protected disc
or locked card is loaded.
• the HDD, disc, or card has no remaining
space.
*2 No icon appears when:
• no disc or card is inserted.
• an unusable disc or card is inserted.
*3 No remaining time or number will be
displayed when a protected disc or locked
card, or a finalized DVD-RW (VF mode)/
DVD-R/+RW disc is inserted.
*4 Sometimes longer recording than indicated
is possible while recording in XTRA mode.
*5 The number of recordable stills is
approximate. Depending on the recording
conditions, the number may not decrease.
*6 Combining scenes will not increase the
remaining number of recordable scenes.
Full Almost empty

45
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Recording Still Pictures
Still pictures are recorded on an SD memory Card.
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
1Turn
Turn
Turn
TurnTurn the pow
the pow
the pow
the pow the power switch t
er switch t
er switch t
er switch ter switch to “SD”.
o “SD”.
o “SD”.
o “SD”.o “SD”.
2Open the LCD monit
Open the LCD monit
Open the LCD monit
Open the LCD monitOpen the LCD monitor.
or.
or.
or.or.
3Press PHOTO/SELECT halfway down.
Press PHOTO/SELECT halfway down.
Press PHOTO/SELECT halfway down.
Press PHOTO/SELECT halfway down.Press PHOTO/SELECT halfway down.
A subject in the center of the sc
A subject in the center of the sc
A subject in the center of the sc
A subject in the center of the scA subject in the center of the screen will
reen will
reen will
reen willreen will be foc
be foc
be foc
be foc be focused. Whe
used. Whe
used. Whe
used. Wheused. When focus i
n focus i
n focus i
n focus in focus is lo
s lo
s lo
s los locked, the
cked, the
cked, the
cked, the cked, the
green “
green “
green “
green “green “m
m
m
mm” in the LCD monitor wi
” in the LCD monitor wi
” in the LCD monitor wi
” in the LCD monitor wi” in the LCD monitor wil
l
l
lll turn purple.
l turn purple.
l turn purple.
l turn purple.l turn purple.
4Fully press PHOTO/SELECT.
Fully press PHOTO/SELECT.
Fully press PHOTO/SELECT.
Fully press PHOTO/SELECT.Fully press PHOTO/SELECT.
The image will be recorded. After a
The image will be recorded. After a
The image will be recorded. After a
The image will be recorded. After a The image will be recorded. After a few secon
few secon
few secon
few seconfew seconds, the im
ds, the im
ds, the im
ds, the imds, the image shot wi
age shot wi
age shot wi
age shot wiage shot will be
ll be
ll be
ll be ll be
displayed for a
displayed for a
displayed for a
displayed for adisplayed for about three seconds. You ca
bout three seconds. You ca
bout three seconds. You ca
bout three seconds. You cabout three seconds. You can shoot the next photo when “
n shoot the next photo when “
n shoot the next photo when “
n shoot the next photo when “n shoot the next photo when “m
m
m
mm”
”
”
” ”
changes back to green
changes back to green
changes back to green
changes back to greenchanges back to green.
.
.
..
Press and hold the l
Press and hold the l
Press and hold the l
Press and hold the lPress and hold the lock button
ock button
ock button
ock button ock button
to turn the power s
to turn the power s
to turn the power s
to turn the power sto turn the power switch.
witch.
witch.
witch.witch.

46
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording
Hints
• For details on screen displays during recording, see p.42.
• If you want to compose a shot in which the subject is not centered, first
press PHOTO/SELECT halfway with the subject centered in the monitor.
Next, with the button pressed halfway, compose your shot and fully press
PHOTO/SELECT.
• If the camcorder has difficulty focusing, adjust the focus manually (p.64).
• Although it is possible to fully press PHOTO/SELECT in a single action
without pressing it halfway, the image may be out of focus.
• You can check the card capacity and number of remaining recordable
pictures (p.176).
• If you are unable to record still pictures, see “Troubleshooting” (p.157).
• About Sleep Mode
– You can also return to record pause mode from sleep mode by pressing
PHOTO/SELECT. To record, you need to press PHOTO/SELECT
again.
– When you return to pause mode from sleep mode, the zoom position
(approx. 1.5×), manual focus, exposure, and backlight compensation will
return to their default settings (p.62, 64–67).
– Regardless of the power save setting (p.60), the camcorder power will
automatically turn off if standby in sleep mode continues for
approximately 30 minutes. In this case, first turn the power switch to
“OFF”, then turn it to “SD”.
Notes
• After recording, do not disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger until
“m
m
m
mm” lights green in the LCD monitor. Doing so may cause an error in the
recorded data and you may not be able to play back the data (p.170).
• Hold the camcorder with both hands and tuck your elbows to your chest or
sides for best recording results.
• When recording with digital zoom, use a tripod for best results.
• The recorded image may differ slightly from the image in the LCD monitor.

47
View
View
View
ViewViewing
ing
ing
inging
Playback
(Watching Your Recordings)
Recorded movies and still pictures are referred to as “scenes”. For movies, a scene
is one continuous uninterrupted recording, and for still images, a scene is one still
picture.
Open the LCD monitor before starting playback (p.19).
Playing back the last recorded scene
You can play back the last recorded scene right away.
If the camcorder
If the camcorder
If the camcorder
If the camcorder If the camcorder is not in record pause
is not in record pause
is not in record pause
is not in record pause is not in record pause mode, set the camcorder to recor
mode, set the camcorder to recor
mode, set the camcorder to recor
mode, set the camcorder to recormode, set the camcorder to record pause mode
d pause mode
d pause mode
d pause mode d pause mode
for the medium
for the medium
for the medium
for the mediumfor the medium you want to play back (p
you want to play back (p
you want to play back (p
you want to play back (p you want to play back (p.40,
.40,
.40,
.40, .40, p
p
p
pp.45).
.45).
.45).
.45)..45).
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.
irmation button.irmation button.
The scene recorded last will play back.
When playing back a movie, playback is paused after the final frame and “
i
i
i
ii
”
(playback pause icon at the final frame) appears. If this condition continues for more
than five minutes, the camcorder will automatically return to record pause mode. To
promptly return to record pause mode, press
C
C
C
CC
.
(Disc Navigation)
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc/ / / /A (confirmation)
MENU
C (stop/exit)
PHOTO/SELECT
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (VR
(VR
(VR
(VR (VR)
)
)
)) R
R
R
RR
-RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (VF
(VF
(VF
(VF (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
Viewing

48
View
View
View
ViewViewing
ing
ing
inging
Deleting the last recorded scene
Play back the last recorded scene (p.47).
Play back the last recorded scene (p.47).
Play back the last recorded scene (p.47).
Play back the last recorded scene (p.47).Play back the last recorded scene (p.47).
Press
Press
Press
Press Press MENU.
.
.
..
Select “Edit”
Select “Edit”
Select “Edit”
Select “Edit” Select “Edit”
“Delete Scene”, then press the confirmation bu
“Delete Scene”, then press the confirmation bu
“Delete Scene”, then press the confirmation bu
“Delete Scene”, then press the confirmation bu“Delete Scene”, then press the confirmation button.
tton.
tton.
tton.tton.
Choosing and playing back a scene
Press
Press
Press
Press Press while the medi
while the medi
while the medi
while the medi while the media you want to play b
a you want to play b
a you want to play b
a you want to play ba you want to play back is in record pause mo
ack is in record pause mo
ack is in record pause mo
ack is in record pause moack is in record pause mode.
de.
de.
de.de.
The scenes thumbnails appear on the disc navigation screen.
*1
The icon displayed represents a photo recorded that uses another Hitachi DVD camcorder
that can record photos on a DVD-RAM disc. (This DVD camcorder cannot record photos
on a DVD-RAM disc.)
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR)
R)
R)
R)R) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
YES NO
Delete scene?
ENTER
Delete Scene
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing
Select “YES” by pressing Select “YES” by pressing d
d
d
dd, th
, th
, th
, th, then press the
en press the
en press the
en press the en press the
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmaticonfirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button.on button.
The scene will be deleted.
• To cancel deletion, select “NO” and
press the confirmation button or simply
press C
C
C
CC.
• After deleting or canceling deletion, the
camcorder will return to record pause
mode.
Hint
There is another playback method using the disc navigation screen (see
below). In this case, “Delete Scene” does not appear after pressing MENU.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR)
R)
R)
R)R) R
R
R
RR
-RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VF)
F)
F)
F)F) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
0 01 / 01 4A l l P r og ra
m
s
PLAY SELECT
PHOTO
Still image icon *1
Operation guide *2
Thumbnail
Current scene number/
Total number of scenes
Bar graph
Icon of HDD, DVD/
card type *4
Currently
selected scene
Dub mark Current page
position*3

49
View
View
View
ViewViewing
ing
ing
inging
Icons displayed in a thumbnail:
Choose a scene by pressing
Choose a scene by pressing
Choose a scene by pressing
Choose a scene by pressing Choose a scene by pressing f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
/
/
/
// (up/d
(up/d
(up/d
(up/d (up/down, pr
own, pr
own, pr
own, prown, previous page/
evious page/
evious page/
evious page/evious page/following p
following p
following p
following pfollowing page) and
age) and
age) and
age) and age) and
d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc
/
/
/
// (left/right).
(left/right).
(left/right).
(left/right). (left/right).
• Holding down the button will increase the scene selection speed. Use the
“Current scene number/Total number of scenes” display and the bar graph as
reference.
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation butto
irmation butto
irmation butto
irmation buttoirmation button.
n.
n.
n.n.
The chosen scene is played back.
Playback is paused at the final frame of the last scene, and “i
i
i
ii”
(playback pause
icon at the final frame)
appears. When this condition continues for longer than
five minutes, the display will automatically return to the disc navigation screen.
• To promptly return to the disc navigation screen, press C
C
C
CC or .
To return to record pause mode, press C
C
C
CC or again.
• If you press the confirmation button while “i
i
i
ii” is displayed, playback starts
from the first scene.
Choosing and playing back multiple scenes
After step of “Choosing and playing back a scene” (p.48), perform procedures
according to your purpose from the table below. When you have finished choosing
scenes, press the confirmation button to begin playing them back.
• You can utilize more than one method in the table below when choosing scenes.
• You can choose up to 999 scenes.
• The color of the frame(s) may change depending on your operations as follows:
– Yellow: indicates your current position (cursor frame)
– Red: indicates scenes already chosen
– Blue: indicates the range of consecutive scenes being selected
– 2-color frame: includes the meaning of both colors
*2
The operation guide will vary depending on the operation status of the DVD camcorder.
Each press of
DISPLAY
switches the information of the currently selected scene as follows:
Date and time of recording, Movie quality (VIDEO mode)/Wide (16:9) mode/Movie length
(only HDD), Operation guide.
*3
Appears when 13 scenes or more have been recorded.
*4
When using a disc, the icon that corresponds to the type of disc being used will appear,
and “ ” will appear for a card.
: Dub mark (p.80) : Photo (p.27) : Lock (p.110)
: Fade-in (p.106) : Fade-out (p.106) :Skip (p.107)
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR
-RW (VR
-RW (VR
-RW (VR-RW (VR)
)
)
)) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

50
View
View
View
ViewViewing
ing
ing
inging
Jumping to the designated scene
Press
Press
Press
Press Press MENU after step
after step
after step
after step after step of “Choosing and pl
of “Choosing and pl
of “Choosing and pl
of “Choosing and pl of “Choosing and playing back a scene” (p
aying back a scene” (p
aying back a scene” (p
aying back a scene” (paying back a scene” (p.48)—while a
.48)—while a
.48)—while a
.48)—while a .48)—while a
scene is played back.
scene is played back.
scene is played back.
scene is played back.scene is played back.
The Menu appears.
Select “Go To” by pressing
Select “Go To” by pressing
Select “Go To” by pressing
Select “Go To” by pressing Select “Go To” by pressing f
f
f
ff/
/
/
//e
e
e
ee c
c
c
cc
, then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press .
.
.
..
Select “Top”, “End”, or
Select “Top”, “End”, or
Select “Top”, “End”, or
Select “Top”, “End”, or Select “Top”, “End”, or “Specify” by pressing
“Specify” by pressing
“Specify” by pressing
“Specify” by pressing “Specify” by pressing f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
/
/
/
// ,
,
,
,, then press the confirmation
then press the confirmation
then press the confirmation
then press the confirmation then press the confirmation
button to confir
button to confir
button to confir
button to confirbutton to confirm.
m.
m.
m.m.
Top: Goes to the beginning, then pauses playback.
End: Goes to the end, then pauses playback.
Specify: Goes to the specified point, then pauses playback. (See next page on
how to specify a point.)
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation butto
irmation butto
irmation butto
irmation buttoirmation button.
n.
n.
n.n.
Select multiple scenes
individually
Select a scene by pressing
Select a scene by pressing
Select a scene by pressing
Select a scene by pressing Select a scene by pressing d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
/
/
/
// /
/
/
// /
/
/
// ,
,
,
, ,
then press
then press
then press
then press then press PHOTO/SELECT.
.
.
..
Repeat this step to choose the next scene.
Repeat this step to choose the next scene.
Repeat this step to choose the next scene.
Repeat this step to choose the next scene. Repeat this step to choose the next scene.
Using the current scene as
your starting point, select
multiple previous or
succeeding consecutive
scenes
Press and ho
Press and ho
Press and ho
Press and hoPress and hold
ld
ld
ld ld PHOTO/SELECT until the
until the
until the
until the until the
cursor frame become
cursor frame become
cursor frame become
cursor frame becomecursor frame becomes blue.
s blue.
s blue.
s blue.s blue.
Choose a final scene by pressing
Choose a final scene by pressing
Choose a final scene by pressing
Choose a final scene by pressing Choose a final scene by pressing
d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
/
/
/
// /
/
/
// /
/
/
// ,
,
,
, ,
then press the con
then press the con
then press the con
then press the conthen press the confirmation button to
firmation button to
firmation button to
firmation button tofirmation button to confirm the
confirm the
confirm the
confirm the confirm the
setting.
setting.
setting.
setting. setting.
Select all scenes from the
first scene to the current
scene. (Menu option:
Start– Current)
Press
Press
Press
Press Press MENU, select “Scene” by pres
, select “Scene” by pres
, select “Scene” by pres
, select “Scene” by pres, select “Scene” by pressing
sing
sing
sing sing
c
c
c
cc,
,
,
, ,
then select “Select” by press
then select “Select” by press
then select “Select” by press
then select “Select” by pressthen select “Select” by pressing
ing
ing
ing ing
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
/
/
/
// .
.
.
..
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
c
c
c
cc or the confirmati
or the confirmati
or the confirmati
or the confirmati or the confirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button.on button.
After ch
After ch
After ch
After chAfter choosing th
oosing th
oosing th
oosing thoosing the desired
e desired
e desired
e desired e desired option by pressing
option by pressing
option by pressing
option by pressingoption by pressing
f
f
f
ff/
e
e
e
ee, press
press
press
press press the confirm
the confirm
the confirm
the confirm the confirmation butto
ation butto
ation butto
ation buttoation button to confirm
n to confirm
n to confirm
n to confirmn to confirm the
the
the
the the
setting.
setting.
setting.
setting.setting.
Select all scenes from the
current scene to the final
scene. (Menu option:
Current– End)
Select all scenes on the
media. (Menu option: All)
Cancel operations while
selecting the range (while a
blue frame is displayed)
Press
Press
Press
Press Press C
C
C
CC.
.
.
..
Cancel selected scenes
individually
Move the cursor frame (yellow) to a selected scene (red)
Move the cursor frame (yellow) to a selected scene (red)
Move the cursor frame (yellow) to a selected scene (red)
Move the cursor frame (yellow) to a selected scene (red) Move the cursor frame (yellow) to a selected scene (red)
you want to cancel
you want to cancel
you want to cancel
you want to cancelyou want to cancel and press
and press
and press
and press and press PHOTO/SELECT.
.
.
..
Cancel all scenes selected Press
Press
Press
Press Press C
C
C
CC.
.
.
..
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

51
z
1
1
1
11
The specify screen will appear.
2
2
2
22
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc
f: To select the beginning
e: To select the end
d c / once:
To move the cursor one
minute back or forward
for HDD (ten seconds for
DVD, one still for card)
Press and hold d / c:
To move the cursor in ten
minutes increments for
HDD (one minute for
DVD, ten stills for card)
GO TO
0 : 0 0 : 0 0 0 : 00: 4 5 0 : 00 : 10
0 : 00 : 10
TOP ENDCURRENT
TO P END ENTER CANCEL
G o t o
Position of currently
played back image
Total recording time
of all selected scenes
Cursor
Cursor position
GO TO
0 : 0 0 : 0 0 0 : 00: 4 5 0 : 00 : 1 0
0 : 00 : 00
TOP ENDCURRENT
TO P END ENTER CANCEL
G o t o
(When the start of the
selected scene is selected)
3
3
3
33
The camcorder will go to the
specified point and enter playback
pause mode.
• To start playback, press the
confirmation button again.
• To cancel the “Go To” procedure
midway, press C before going to
the specified point.
• With a card, the number of stills
will appear at the “Top”, “Current”,
“End”, and “Go To” indicators.
The cursor position is a rough
estimate. The cursor may not move
at even intervals.

52
Various types of information on recording will be superimposed on the playback
image you are viewing.
The display mode switched in the following way each time you press DISPLAY.
• When you play a still image from a card, “Playback.” appears. If the image
file is very large (high resolution, etc.), it will take more time to display.
• The disc navigation screen automatically appears if:
– the HDD/DVD is protected.
– the SD memory card is locked.
– a finalized DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW is loaded.
– a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R recorded on a Hitachi DVD camcorder
other than this model is loaded.
• It may require more time to start playing back if many scenes are chosen.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Increases the volumeDecreases the volume
No display Recording date/time
Playback information display

53
*1 Program or Playlist
*2 Not displayed while playing All Scenes.
*3 See “Current medium and its status
(HDD/DVD/Card)” on p.44.
*4 Appears when set (see p.55, 56, 110).
*5 There are following playback operations:
F
F
F
FF: Standard playback
b
b
b
bb: Playback pause
c
c
c
cc: Forward search playback
d
d
d
dd: Reverse search playback
e
e
e
ee: Forward skip playback
f
f
f
ff: Reverse skip playback
g
g
g
gg: Forward frame advance
h
h
h
hh: Reverse frame back
: Forward slow playback
: Reverse slow playback
For instructions on how to operate,
see p.54.
“j
j
j
jj” appears after the first still or the first
frame of the first movie is played when
playing reverse.
“i
i
i
ii” appears after the last still or the last
frame of the last movie is played when
playing forward.
0 060 6 0 0 : 0 0 : 1 6
003 1 0 0 — 0 0 0 3
Recording mode
Current medium
(HDD/DVD)*3
Counter
Playback operation*5
Repeat play*4
Program/Playlist No.* 2
Scene No.
Scene No.
File name Slide Show*4
Lock*4
Recording mode Playback operation*5
Program/Playlist List*1

54
The following functions will operate
during playback pause in the same
way as during playback. However, if
the button is released, playback will
return to playback pause.
• Skipping
• Continuous skipping
The following functions only operate
during playback pause.
Functions Press
Pause
The confirmation button
Fast-
forward/
Reverse
c
c
c
cc (Forward)/d
d
d
d d
(Reverse) and hold
Skip
forward/
backward
e
e
e
ee (Forward)/
f
f
f
f f (Reverse)
• If you press f
f
f
ff within a few
seconds from the beginning of a
scene, playback starts from the
beginning of the previous scene.
• If you press e
e
e
ee while the last
scene is playing back, playback is
paused at the final frame of the last
scene.
Continuous
skipping
e
e
e
ee (Forward)/f
f
f
f f
(Reverse) and hold
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Functions Press
Frame by
frame
playback
(forward/
reverse)
c
c
c
cc (Forward)/
d
d
d
d d (Reverse)
• No sound will be heard.
• Frames are advanced in intervals
of approx. 0.03 seconds and
reversed in intervals of approx.
0.5 seconds.
Slow
playback
(Forward/
Reverse)
c
c
c
cc (Forward)/d
d
d
d d
(Reverse) and hold
• No sound will be heard.
• Slow playback advances in
intervals of approx. 0.03 seconds
and reverses in intervals of
approx. 0.5 seconds.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

55
Reminder: For still images, a “scene”
is one still image, a photograph.
When you play back when the slide
show is On, still pictures are played
one after the other.
If the playback range of scenes has
been specified, the slide show plays
back this specified range of scenes.
MENU
• Playback starts from the
beginning regardless of the
selected scene or cursor
position.
• The camcorder enters playback
pause after showing the last
picture.
• To return to the disc navigation
screen, press C.
Functions Press
Playing
previous or
later scenes
(stills)
e
e
e
ee c
c
c
cc/ (Forward)/
f
f
f
ff/d
d
d
d d (Reverse)
Each time you press e
e
e
ee c
c
c
cc/ or
f
f
f
ff d
d
d
dd/ , the next or previous still is
shown. If you continue pressing,
stills are played back successively
until you release the button, or the
last/first scene is reached.
• For automatic playback for still
pictures, use the slide show
function.
• If the temperature inside the
camcorder gets too high, the
camcorder may fail to function
normally. Turn off the power and
wait awhile before turning the
power back on.
• In slow playback, images with
fast-moving subjects may appear
blurred.
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

56
You can capture and record an image
displayed during movie playback as a
photo.
The number of photo pixels differs
depending on the mode as follows:
In 16:9 mode: 640 × 360 pixels
In 4:3 mode: 640 × 480 pixels
PHOTO/SELECT
MENU
• If you press PHOTO/SELECT,
go to step . If you press
MENU, proceed to the next
step.
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
c
c
c
cc
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
d
d
d
dd
• To cancel capturing, either press
the confirmation button while
“NO” is selected or press C
C
C
CC.
• After capturing is complete or
canceled, the screen will return
to playback pause.
When this function is On, all scenes
will play back from the first scene to
the last scene repeatedly.
If a range of scenes (or just one scene)
is specified (p.49), playback of the
specified scenes will be repeated.
MENU
f
f
f
ff
e
e
e
ee c
c
c
cc
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee c
c
c
cc
f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee
MENU
• To quit playback, press C
C
C
CC.
(“Repeat Play” remains “On”.)
• “Repeat Play” will be set to
“Off” if:
– you repeat the steps and
select “Off” instead of “On”
in step
– turn off the power
– remove the DVD
• Repeat playback will not
function when you play the last
scene when the camcorder is in
record pause mode.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
))
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

57
How to Op
How to Op
How to Op
How to OpHow to Operate t
erate t
erate t
erate terate the Menu
he Menu
he Menu
he Menuhe Menu
1
1
1
11
MENU
You can also use QUICK MENU to display
the Quick Menu screen which contains only
basic menu items.
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
On
A u t oP r o g r a
m
AE
W
h i t e Ba l .
D i g . Z o om
M I C . F i l t e r
E I S
ENTER RETURN
40x
O f f
A u t o
Ca
m
e r a F u n c t i o n s S e t u p
A
A
V I DEO Mo d e F I NE
I n p u t So u r c e CAMERA
ENTER RETURN
R e c o r d F u n c t i o n s Se t u p
1 6 : 9 On
OSD Ou t pu t On
On
A u t oP r o g r a
m
AE
D i g . Z o om
M I C . F i l t e r
E I S
40x
O f f
A u t o
Ca
m
e r a F u n c t i o n s Se t u p
A
A
W
h i t e Ba l .
ENTER RETURN
The title of the selected icon
on the left appears at the top.
Press right or down on the center
to move the cursor to the right.
Press up/down
to move the
cursor up or
down.
Current settings appear first.
After selecting one of the setup
items, its options appear.
To cancel/exit and return to the
previous stage
* To quit without changing the setting,
press MENU before pressing the
confirmation button.
To go back left in the Menu
These operations work
almost the same way.

58
Menu (Wh
Menu (Wh
Menu (Wh
Menu (WhMenu (While Recordi
ile Recordi
ile Recordi
ile Recordiile Recording)
ng)
ng)
ng)ng)
Menu items
(1st level)
Menu items
(2nd level)
Quick
Menu
items
Common
to movie
and stills
See
Camera Functions Setup
* Not displayed while using
the external input
function
(DZ-HS903A)
Program AE p.67
White Balance p.68
EIS p.71
Digital Zoom p.62
MIC. Filter p.71
Record Functions Setup
VIDEO Mode p.75
16:9 p.75
Input Source
(DZ-HS903A) p.78
OSD Output p.116
LCD Setup LCD Adjust p.60
Date Setup Date Set p.23
Date Mode p.61
Initial Setup
Beep p.60
Power Save p.60
Record LED p.74
Language p.22
Demo Mode p.61
Reset p.60

59
Menu items
(1st level)
Menu items
(2nd level)
Quick
Menu
items
Common
to movie
and stills
See
Camera Functions Setup
* Not displayed while using
the external input function
(DZ-HS903A)
Program AE p.67
White Balance p.68
Digital Zoom p.62
Flash p.72
Record Functions Setup
Quality p.77
Input Source
(DZ-HS903A) p.78
PHOTO Input
(DZ-HS903A) p.78
Self Timer p.79
OSD Output p.116
LCD Setup LCD Adjust p.60
Date Setup Date Set p.23
Date Mode p.61
Initial Setup
Beep p.60
Power Save p.60
Record LED p.74
Language p.22
Demo Mode p.61
Reset p.60

60
See “Setting the date and time” (p.23) for setting procedures.
Menu items s Explanation of function Initial
value
LCD Adjust Color Level Adjusts the color level of the
LCD monitor. –
Beep Select “Off” to turn off the beeps that sound
when any button is pressed. On
Power Save
When set to “On”, the camcorder power will
automatically turn off if it is left idle for
approx. five minutes during record pause
mode.
When set to “Off”, the camcorder does not
turn off automatically except while in sleep
mode.
Off
Record LED p.74 On
Language You can select the display language. English
Demo Mode p.61 Auto
Reset Returns all menu settings to default. –
LCD SetupInitial Setup
The camcorder is equipped with a built-in rechargeable battery to retain the
date and time in memory. If the built-in battery is depleted, the date and time
will need to be reset. Periodically (once every six months) recharge the
internal battery by connecting the camcorder to a wall outlet or attaching a
charged battery pack to the camcorder while leaving the camcorder turned off
for 24 hours.

61
You can change the date format to “D/M/Y” or “Y/M/D”.
(Selecting “D/M/Y” will change the clock to 24 hour style.)
MENU
At time of purchase of this camcorder, this function is set to “Auto”.
A demonstration starts automatically when you connect the AC adapter/
charger to the camcorder as a power source and leave the camcorder idle
for more than approx. ten minutes, after turning on the power and set the
camcorder to:
• HDD, or
• the medium (DVD or SD memory card) which is not inserted in the
camcorder.
To cancel the demonstration, press any one of the camcorder buttons.
Auto: See above.
Off: Turns off the demonstration function.
Start: The demonstration will start right away. If you cancel the
demonstration, the prior setting will be restored (“AUTO” or “OFF”).
• If a battery pack is connected to the camcorder as a power source, the
demonstration will not begin even if “Demo Mode” is set to “Auto”.
• The demonstration function does not work when the camcorder is connected
to a PC.

62
Magnif
Magnif
Magnif
MagnifMagnified Recording
ied Recording
ied Recording
ied Recordingied Recording
(Opti
(Opti
(Opti
(Opti(Optical Zoom an
cal Zoom an
cal Zoom an
cal Zoom ancal Zoom and
d
d
d d
Digita
Digita
Digita
DigitaDigital Zoom)
l Zoom)
l Zoom)
l Zoom)l Zoom)
The zoom lever allows you to choose
a range of magnifications from wide-
angle to telephoto zooming.
Optical zooming up to ten times is the
maximum telephoto magnification.
Maximum zoom values will depend
on the “Digital Zoom” settings in the
Menu as follows.
Off
When the zoom is used, the following
optical zoom bar appears in the LCD
monitor.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
T:Telephot
o
(Magnifies
recording)
W:Wide-angle
(Recording over
a wide range)
TW
Current zoom position
Maximum optical zoom
40x
When the optical zoom exceeds ten
magnifications, the digital zoom
starts working automatically. The
maximum telephoto zoom value is
40x magnification. The zoom bar
appears as follows.
240x
The maximum telephoto zoom is
240x magnification. The zoom bar
appears as follows.
1
1
1
11 MENU
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
MENU
• The “Digital Zoom” setting is
retained in memory even when
the power is turned off.
TW
Current zoom position
Maximum
optical zoom
Digital range
TW
Current zoom position
Maximum
optical zoom
Digital range

63
Recording
Recording
Recording
RecordingRecording at Close
at Close
at Close
at Close at Close
Range
Range
Range
RangeRange
(Macr
(Macr
(Macr
(Macr(Macro Recordi
o Recordi
o Recordi
o Recordio Recording)
ng)
ng)
ng)ng)
When you record a small subject at
close range, you can bring the lens
surface as close as approx. 13/16″ (2
cm) to the subject. This will allow you
to enlarge the subject to cover the
entire screen.
You can also use the remote
control for changing the maximum
digital value. Each press of
DIGITAL ZOOM switches the
“Digital Zoom” setting as follows;
“Off” ”→ “40x” → “240x
(When using a card)
“Off” ↔ “40x”
• The maximum telephoto zoom is
40x when using a card even if
“Digital Zoom” is set to “240x”.
• When operating the zoom lever,
the focus may blur for a moment.
• When digital zoom is added, the
image quality will become
coarser.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
1
1
1
11
• Recording up close may
require more lighting. If the
screen is dark, direct a light
source at the subject.
Using
Using
Using
UsingUsing the Separate
the Separate
the Separate
the Separate the Separately-
ly-
ly-
ly-ly-
Sold Le
Sold Le
Sold Le
Sold LeSold Lenses to
nses to
nses to
nses to nses to
Increa
Increa
Increa
IncreaIncrease the W
se the W
se the W
se the Wse the Wide-
ide-
ide-
ide-ide-
Angle o
Angle o
Angle o
Angle oAngle or Tele
r Tele
r Tele
r Teler Telephoto
photo
photo
photo photo
Effe
Effe
Effe
EffeEffect
ct
ct
ctct
Use the tele-conversion lens DZ-TL1
(separately-sold) to increase the
telephoto effect, and the wide-
conversion lens DZ-WL1 (separately-
sold) to increase the wide-angle
effect.
To attach one of the lenses, firstly you
need to attach the step-up ring DZ-
SR3037 (separately sold).
Although the zoom can be used, the
focus may become blurred
depending on the distance to the
subject.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

64
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Attaching the separately
sold lenses
Focusing range
• T (telephoto) side:
Approx. 3.2 feet (1 m) from the lens
surface to infinity.
• W (wide-angle) side:
Approx. 13/16″ (2 cm) from the
lens surface to infinity.
1
1
1
11
Attach the step-up rin
Attach the step-up rin
Attach the step-up rin
Attach the step-up rinAttach the step-up ring to the
g to the
g to the
g to the g to the
camcorder
camcorder
camcorder
camcordercamcorder.
.
.
..
Th
Th
Th
ThThen remove the lens cap from the
en remove the lens cap from the
en remove the lens cap from the
en remove the lens cap from the en remove the lens cap from the
conversion lens and a
conversion lens and a
conversion lens and a
conversion lens and aconversion lens and attach the
ttach the
ttach the
ttach the ttach the
conversion lens to th
conversion lens to th
conversion lens to th
conversion lens to thconversion lens to the camcorder
e camcorder
e camcorder
e camcordere camcorder.
.
.
..
Conversion lens
Step-up ring
Notes
• If you attach the DZ-TL1
conversion lens, the focusing
range at the T (telephoto) side
will be from approx. 16.4 feet (5
m) to infinity.
• When you zoom while the
conversion lens is attached, the
four corners of the screen may
become a little dark or scratchy at
the W (Wide) side. (The four
corners may not be evenly dark.)
• When changing lenses, be careful
not to drop the camcorder.
• Attaching a conversion lens will
prevent you from using the flash.
Turn the “Flash” setting to “Off”
(p.72).
Adjustin
Adjustin
Adjustin
AdjustinAdjusting the Fo
g the Fo
g the Fo
g the Fog the Focus
cus
cus
cus cus
Manuall
Manuall
Manuall
ManuallManually
y
y
yy
(Manua
(Manua
(Manua
(Manua(Manual Focu
l Focu
l Focu
l Focul Focus)
s)
s)
s)s)
If it is difficult to adjust the focus
automatically, you can adjust it
manually (Manual Focus). (See also
“Difficult auto focus conditions”
(p.65).)
• If you intend to use any
commercially available
conversion lens, make sure its
filter diameter is 30.5mm and the
screw pitch is 0.5mm. (Note that
some lenses may be unusable
depending on their shape.)
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

65
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
How to focus manually
Difficult auto focus
conditions
1
1
1
11
During record
During record
During record
During recordDuring record pause or recording,
pause or recording,
pause or recording,
pause or recording, pause or recording,
press
press
press
press press e (MF).
.
.
..
The Focus icon appears in the
LCD monitor.
• Focusing switches between
Manual Focus and Auto Focus
each time e (MF) is pressed.
The icon is displayed only
during manual focusing.
2
2
2
22
Push the zoom
Push the zoom
Push the zoom
Push the zoomPush the zoom lever towa
lever towa
lever towa
lever towa lever toward the T
rd the T
rd the T
rd the T rd the T
(telephoto)
(telephoto)
(telephoto)
(telephoto)(telephoto) side to magni
side to magni
side to magni
side to magni side to magnify the
fy the
fy the
fy the fy the
subject.
subject.
subject.
subject.subject.
3 0 MIN
0:00:00
REM
FINE
8 : 0 0 AM
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
Manual focus icon
3
3
3
33
Adjust the f
Adjust the f
Adjust the f
Adjust the fAdjust the focus by pr
ocus by pr
ocus by pr
ocus by procus by pressing
essing
essing
essing essing d
d
d
dd/
/
/
//
c
c
c
cc.
.
.
..
• When the power is turned off,
the camcorder returns to auto
focus.
• To manually adjust the focus,
always magnify the subject as
in step 2. When the focus is
adjusted for wide-angle
zooming, the focus may
become blurred if you switch
to telephoto zooming.
Hint
If you wish to adjust exposure
while focusing manually, press
f. To return to manual focusing,
press e.
Subjects are not
in the center of
the frame
Subjects that
are both near
and far
Subjects lit by a
neon sign or spot
light which glares
or emits strong
light
Subjects behind
glass covered
with water
droplets or dirt

66
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Adjusting the exposure
manually
Adjustin
Adjustin
Adjustin
AdjustinAdjusting the
g the
g the
g the g the
Brightne
Brightne
Brightne
BrightneBrightness of t
ss of t
ss of t
ss of tss of the
he
he
he he
Image
Image
Image
ImageImage (Exposu
(Exposu
(Exposu
(Exposu (Exposure)
re)
re)
re)re)
Normally, the exposure is
automatically adjusted. However,
depending on the recording
conditions, the exposure can be
adjusted manually.
Subjects moving
rapidly Subjects with
minimal
variation in
brightness such
as a white wall
Dark subjects Night views
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
1
1
1
11
During record pa
During record pa
During record pa
During record paDuring record pause or recordi
use or recordi
use or recordi
use or recordiuse or recording,
ng,
ng,
ng, ng,
press
press
press
press press f ( ).
.
.
..
The exposure bar appears in the
LCD monitor.
• Each time you press f ( ),
exposure adjustment switches
between manual adjustment
and automatic adjustment. The
exposure bar appears only
during manual adjustment.
2
2
2
22
Adjust th
Adjust th
Adjust th
Adjust thAdjust the exposure by
e exposure by
e exposure by
e exposure by e exposure by pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing d
d
d
dd/
/
/
//
c
c
c
cc.
.
.
..
• When the power is turned off,
exposure adjustment returns to
automatic adjustment.
3 0 MIN
0:00:00
REM
FINE
8 : 0 0 AM
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
Exposure Bar
Hint
If you wish to adjust focus
manually while adjusting
exposure, press e.
To return to exposure adjustment,
press f.

67
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Compensat
Compensat
Compensat
CompensatCompensating for
ing for
ing for
ing for ing for
Backlight
Backlight
Backlight
BacklightBacklight (Backlig
(Backlig
(Backlig
(Backlig (Backlight
ht
ht
ht ht
Compens
Compens
Compens
CompensCompensation
ation
ation
ationation)
)
)
))
When the subject is lit from the rear,
this function will compensate for
lighting so that the subject is not too
dark.
1
1
1
11
During record
During record
During record
During recordDuring record pause or recording,
pause or recording,
pause or recording,
pause or recording, pause or recording,
press
press
press
press press BLC.
.
.
..
The backlight compensation
icon appears in the LCD
monitor.
• Each time you press BLC, the
backlight setting turns On or
Off. The backlight
compensation icon appears
only when this function is On.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
3 0 MIN
0:00:00
REM
FINE 8 : 0 0 AM
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
Backlight compensation icon
• When the power is turned off,
the backlight compensation
setting returns to Off.
Selecting
Selecting
Selecting
SelectingSelecting a Program
a Program
a Program
a Program a Program
AE Mo
AE Mo
AE Mo
AE MoAE Mode to Matc
de to Matc
de to Matc
de to Matcde to Match the
h the
h the
h theh the
Conditio
Conditio
Conditio
ConditioConditions
ns
ns
nsns
(Program
(Program
(Program
(Program(Program AE)
AE)
AE)
AE) AE)
The camcorder automatically gauges
the subject and surrounding
conditions and determines the
optimal settings for recording (during
Auto). However, you can also select a
Program AE mode that better suits the
situation for even clearer images.
Auto
The Camcorder automatically
detects the subject and surrounding
conditions for optimum
recording.
S sport
Reduces blurring when
recording rapidly moving
subjects such as tennis.
Portrait
Makes the subject, such as a
person or pet, stand out from a
blurred background.
Spotlight
Prevents overexposure of the
subject in strong light, such as at
a wedding or on stage.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

68
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Selecting a Program AE
mode
White balance mode
S S wand& no
Prevents underexposure of the
subject in very bright conditions,
such as at the beach or on a ski slope.
Low Light
Allows you to record in dark
places with limited light.
1
1
1
11 During record paus
During record paus
During record paus
During record pausDuring record pause, press
e, press
e, press
e, press e, press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera FuncSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
tions Setup”
tions Setup”
tions Setup” tions Setup”
“Program
“Program
“Program
“Program“Program AE”
AE”
AE”
AE” AE” a Program AE
a Program AE
a Program AE
a Program AE a Program AE
mode
mode
mode
modemode
3
3
3
33
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirmaPress the confirmation button to
tion button to
tion button to
tion button to tion button to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, thenconfirm, then
MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
The selected Program AE mode
(other than Auto) appears in the
LCD monitor (p.42).
• The Program AE mode is
retained in memory even when
the power is turned off.
Notes
• When recording in dark places,
after-images may appear if the
subject is moving or if camera
shake occurs. Use a tripod for
best results.
• If you use Sports mode under
fluorescent light, the LCD screen
may flicker. In such a case, use
Auto mode.
Adjusting t
Adjusting t
Adjusting t
Adjusting tAdjusting the Color
he Color
he Color
he Color he Color
(White
(White
(White
(White(White Balance
Balance
Balance
Balance Balance)
)
)
))
Light is required when recording
subjects. While the naked eye
perceives colors as they are, images
recorded by a camera may appear
redder or bluer than they actually are.
To record white colored subjects as
white images, adjust the white
balance.
The camcorder normally adjusts the
color automatically (during Auto).
Change the white balance setting
according to the recording conditions.
A suto (No icon appear .)
Set
When recording sunsets and
sunrises, recording in shade, and
recording a stage lit with a spot light,
you can manually adjust white
balance to match the light source or
situation.
Outdoors
To record in fine weather.
Indoor 1
To record under incandescent
light, halogen light or soft fluorescent
light.
Indoor 2
To record under bright
fluorescent light
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

69
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Selecting a white
balance mode
1
1
1
11 Duri
Duri
Duri
DuriDuring r
ng r
ng r
ng rng reco
eco
eco
ecoecord
rd
rd
rd rd paus
paus
paus
pauspause, press
e, press
e, press
e, presse, press
MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions SetupSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“White B
“White B
“White B
“White B“White Balance”
alance”
alance”
alance” alance” a white
a white
a white
a white a white balance
balance
balance
balance balance
mode
mode
mode
modemode
3
3
3
33
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation but
irmation but
irmation but
irmation butirmation button to
ton to
ton to
ton to ton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
The selected white balance mode
(other than Auto) will appear on
the screen (p.42).
• The white balance mode is
retained in memory even when
the power is turned off.
Notes
• Do not block the infrared sensor
with your hand or other things to
obtain a good cast for your
recording.
• If a tele-conversion lens or wide-
conversion lens is attached, the
white balance may not be
properly adjusted automatically
depending on the conditions. In
such a case, select the appropriate
white balance mode or set the
white balance manually.
• The white balance does not work
properly if you turn on the power
while the lens cap is attached to
the lens. Be sure to remove the
lens cap before turning on the
power.
Infrared sensor

70
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Setting the white
balance manually
(Set)
Prepare a white object such a thick
sheet of white paper that is not
translucent.
1
1
1
11
P
P
P
PPoi
oi
oi
oioint the camcorder a
nt the camcorder a
nt the camcorder a
nt the camcorder ant the camcorder at the white
t the white
t the white
t the white t the white
object so that it fills the screen.
object so that it fills the screen.
object so that it fills the screen.
object so that it fills the screen.object so that it fills the screen.
2
2
2
22 During record paus
During record paus
During record paus
During record pausDuring record pause, press
e, press
e, press
e, press e, press MENU.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera Func
Select “Camera FuncSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
tions Setup”
tions Setup”
tions Setup” tions Setup”
“White Balance”
“White Balance”
“White Balance”
“White Balance” “White Balance” “Set”
“Set”
“Set”
“Set” “Set”
4
4
4
44
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation butto
irmation butto
irmation butto
irmation buttoirmation button.
n.
n.
n.n.
“ ” flashes in the LCD
monitor.
5
5
5
55
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation b
irmation b
irmation b
irmation birmation button again,
utton again,
utton again,
utton again, utton again,
and continue hol
and continue hol
and continue hol
and continue holand continue holding the button
ding the button
ding the button
ding the button ding the button
down until
down until
down until
down untildown until
“ ” stops flas
stops flas
stops flas
stops flas stops flashing and
hing and
hing and
hing and hing and
lights s
lights s
lights s
lights slights steadily
teadily
teadily
teadilyteadily.
.
.
..
The white balance setting is
complete.
Thick white
paper
6
6
6
66
Press
Press
Press
Press Press C
C
C
CC to en
to en
to en
to en to end, or to redo, repeat
d, or to redo, repeat
d, or to redo, repeat
d, or to redo, repeatd, or to redo, repeat
step
step
step
stepstep 5.
5.
5.
5. 5.
• The white balance setting
selected in “Set” is retained in
memory until the setting is
changed again.
• In order to accurately adjust
the color, readjust the settings
in “Set” each time the
recording conditions change.
If the power is turned off while
white balance is in “Set”
mode, “ ” flashes in the
LCD monitor the next time the
power is turned on to remind
you. As the previous setting is
retained in memory, redo the
settings if needed.
Notes
• It may be difficult to perform this
setting in dark places. Also if the
zoom bar is positioned in the
digital range (p.62), you may not
be able to set the white balance. If
white balance settings cannot be
accomplished, “ ” will
continue to flash. Return the
zoom to the optical range and
redo the settings in a bright
environment.
• If the “Set” settings are not
completed within a few moments,
the camcorder returns to record
pause mode and “ ” flashes in
the LCD monitor. Redo the
settings from step 1.
• You cannot select “Set” while
“Input Source” is set to “LINE”
(p.78).

71
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Turning EIS Off/On
Turning the MIC. filter
On/Off
Using
Using
Using
UsingUsing the Electron
the Electron
the Electron
the Electron the Electronic
ic
ic
ic ic
Image Stab
Image Stab
Image Stab
Image StabImage Stabilizer (EIS)
ilizer (EIS)
ilizer (EIS)
ilizer (EIS)ilizer (EIS)
EIS corrects for fuzziness in an image
when you zoom in on a subject.
We recommend turning EIS Off when
you position the camcorder on a table
or use a tripod when recording.
1
1
1
11 Duri
Duri
Duri
DuriDurin
n
n
nng rec
g rec
g rec
g recg recor
or
or
orord pa
d pa
d pa
d pad pause, pr
use, pr
use, pr
use, pruse, press
ess
ess
essess
MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions SetupSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“EIS”
“EIS”
“EIS”
“EIS” “EIS” “On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”“On”/“Off”
3
3
3
33
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation but
irmation but
irmation but
irmation butirmation button to
ton to
ton to
ton to ton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
When the function is turned On,
“ ” appears in the LCD
monitor (p.42).
• EIS is retained in memory
even when the power is turned
off.
• If “Off” is selected, be sure to
return the setting to “On”
afterwards, if you do not
normally use a tripod, etc.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Notes
• When EIS is active, there will be
a slight divergence between the
actual camera movement and the
on-screen movement.
• Even if EIS is turned On, the
camera movement may not be
corrected if the movement is too
excessive.
Reducing
Reducing
Reducing
ReducingReducing Wind Noise
Wind Noise
Wind Noise
Wind Noise Wind Noise
During Record
During Record
During Record
During RecordDuring Recording
ing
ing
inging
When recording sound from the built-
in microphone, you can reduce wind
noise in the recording when the MIC.
filter is On. Lower frequencies noise
is eliminated and the target sound
becomes clearer.
1
1
1
11 During record pau
During record pau
During record pau
During record pauDuring record pause
se
se
sese, press
, press
, press
, press , press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Camera Functions
Select “Camera Functions
Select “Camera Functions
Select “Camera FunctionsSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
Setup”
Setup”
Setup” Setup”
“MIC
“MIC
“MIC
“MIC“MIC. Filter”
. Filter”
. Filter”
. Filter” . Filter” “On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off” “On”/“Off”
We recommend you stabilize the
camcorder using both hands and
support your arms against your
body when recording.
• EIS may not function correctly
when a tele-conversion lens or
wide-conversion lens is used.
• When using a card (recording
stills), EIS cannot be set.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

72
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Setting the recording
settings to full auto
3
3
3
33
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirmaPress the confirmation button to
tion button to
tion button to
tion button to tion button to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, thenconfirm, then
MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
When the function is turned On,
“ ” appears in the LCD
monitor (p.42).
• The MIC. filter setting is
retained in memory even when
the power is turned off.
• If you set this function to
“On”, it is recommended to set
the function to “Off” after
recording before turning off
the power unless you always
intend to use this function.
Restor
Restor
Restor
RestorRestoring all th
ing all th
ing all th
ing all thing all the
e
e
e e
Recording Settings to
Recording Settings to
Recording Settings to
Recording Settings to Recording Settings to
Default
Default
Default
DefaultDefault (Full Auto
(Full Auto
(Full Auto
(Full Auto (Full Auto)
)
)
))
You can reset the following manually
adjusted recording settings to their
defaults with the press of a single
button.
Function Default See
Focus Auto p.64
Exposure Auto p.66
BLC (Backlight) Off p.67
Program AE Auto p.67
White Balance Auto p.68
EIS (Electronic
Image Stabilizer) On p.71
MIC. Filter Off p.71
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
1
1
1
11
During record pa
During record pa
During record pa
During record paDuring record pause or recordi
use or recordi
use or recordi
use or recordiuse or recording,
ng,
ng,
ng, ng,
press
press
press
press press FULL AUTO.
.
.
..
“FULL AUTO” appears in the
LCD monitor for a while and the
settings are reset to their default
settings.
Using th
Using th
Using th
Using thUsing the Flas
e Flas
e Flas
e Flase Flash
h
h
hh
As shutter speed will slow down
when still photos are recorded in dim
lighting, camera shake may easily
occur. We recommend you use a flash
in this case.
Normally, the flash fires
automatically depending on the
recording conditions (during Auto).
You can also set the flash to On
(always fires) or Off (does not fire).
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

73
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Flash mode
Selecting a flash mode
Auto
The flash fires only when necessary.
When the flash is needed, “ ”
appears in the LCD monitor when you
press PHOTO/SELECT halfway,
and then the flash fires when you
press PHOTO/SELECT all the way.
On
“ ” is displayed in the LCD monitor
all the time. The flash always fires
when you fully press PHOTO/
SELECT.
Off
“ ” is always displayed in the LCD
monitor and the flash will not fire.
1
1
1
11 Duri
Duri
Duri
DuriDuring r
ng r
ng r
ng rng reco
eco
eco
ecoecord
rd
rd
rd rd paus
paus
paus
pauspause, press
e, press
e, press
e, presse, press
MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions Setup
Select “Camera Functions SetupSelect “Camera Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“Flash”
“Flash”
“Flash”
“Flash” “Flash” a flash mode
a flash mode
a flash mode
a flash mode a flash mode
3
3
3
33
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation but
irmation but
irmation but
irmation butirmation button to
ton to
ton to
ton to ton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
• To check where the flash icon
appears in the LCD monitor,
see p.42.
• The flash setting is retained in
memory even when the power
is turned off.
• If “Off” or “On” is selected,
and you do not plan to record
with that flash mode all the
time, we recommend you
return the setting to “Auto”
after recording and before
turning off the power.
Hints
• There may be cases when the
recorded pictures are out-of-
focus in dark places even if the
flash is used. We recommend
you shine a light on the subject
for recording in dark places.
• “ ” flashes in the LCD
monitor while the flash is
recharging and the flash will not
fire.
• When recording stills up close,
set “Flash” setting to “Off”. If
the subject is too close, image
smearing may occur.
Notes
• When a conversion lens is
attached, the flash cannot be
used. Adjust the “Flash” setting
to “Off”.
• Although the flash range differs
according to the subject, as a
reference, its range is about 3.2–
8.2 feet (1–2.5 m) in dark places.
• Although the amount of light
emitted will automatically be
adjusted at time of emission, the
flash may not be sufficiently
adjusted if the distance to the
subject is too distant or too near.
• In bright or backlit conditions, it
may be difficult to derive the full
effect of the flash.

74
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Turning Off/On the
recording indicator
• When recording consecutive
shots using the flash, the flash
may not fire or the amount of
light emitted may not be
sufficiently adjusted. After using
the flash to record, it is
recommended that you wait for a
while and then press PHOTO/
SELECT to record again.
• Do not emit the flash close up in
front of a person’s eyes. Doing so
may cause eyesight damage.
Particularly when recording
infants using the flash, record at a
distance greater than 3.2 feet (1
m) away.
• Do not fire the flash at the driver/
rider of a moving vehicle or
bicycle, etc. Doing so will
temporary blind the driver and
may result in accident.
• Do not use the flash in locations
where flammable or combustible
gas is present. Doing so may
cause the gas to ignite or explode.
Turnin
Turnin
Turnin
TurninTurning Off the
g Off the
g Off the
g Off the g Off the
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
RecordiRecording Indic
ng Indic
ng Indic
ng Indicng Indica
a
a
aator
tor
tor
tor tor
Bene
Bene
Bene
BeneBeneath t
ath t
ath t
ath tath the Lens
he Lens
he Lens
he Lenshe Lens
The recording indicator beneath the
lens lights red while recording to
indicate that you are recording.
You can turn the indicator off when
recording through reflective objects
such as glass or a fish tank, etc., so its
reflection is not recorded.
1
1
1
11 During record pa
During record pa
During record pa
During record paDuring record pause
use
use
useuse, press
, press
, press
, press , press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Initial Setup”
Select “Initial Setup”
Select “Initial Setup”
Select “Initial Setup” Select “Initial Setup” “Record
“Record
“Record
“Record “Record
LED”
LED”
LED”
LED” LED” “On”/”Off
“On”/”Off
“On”/”Off
“On”/”Off“On”/”Off”
”
”
””
3
3
3
33
Press the confirm
Press the confirm
Press the confirm
Press the confirmPress the confirmation button to
ation button to
ation button to
ation button to ation button to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, thenconfirm, then
MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
• The recording indicator setting
is not displayed in the on-
screen information.
• Even if the recording indicator
is set to “Off”, it will still light
while the self-timer is counting
down (p.79).
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

75
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
HDD movie quality
and recordable time
(DZ-HS903A)
(DZ-HS803A)
DVD movie quality
and recordable time
* In high temperature environments, the
image quality may be degraded to an
FINE equivalent.
Switching movie quality
Chan
Chan
Chan
ChanChanging the Mo
ging the Mo
ging the Mo
ging the Moging the Movie
vie
vie
vie vie
Quality (
Quality (
Quality (
Quality (Quality (VIDEO Mode)
VIDEO Mode)
VIDEO Mode)
VIDEO Mode)VIDEO Mode)
You can change the movie recording
quality to make high quality
recordings or lower the quality to
record over longer periods of time.
Video
Mode Quality Recordable time
XTRA* Best Approx. 7 hrs.
FINE High Approx. 11 hrs.
STD Extended
recording Approx. 23 hrs.
Video
Mode Quality Recordable time
XTRA* Best Approx. 1 hr.
50 mins.
FINE High Approx. 3 hrs.
STD Extended
recording Approx. 6 hrs.
Video
Mode Quality Recordable time
XTRA* Best Approx. 18 mins.
FINE High Approx. 30 mins.
STD Extended
recording Approx. 60 mins.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
1
1
1
11 During record pau
During record pau
During record pau
During record pauDuring record pause
se
se
sese, press
, press
, press
, press , press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions SetupSelect “Record Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“VIDEO Mode”
“VIDEO Mode”
“VIDEO Mode”
“VIDEO Mode” “VIDEO Mode” a movie quality
a movie quality
a movie quality
a movie quality a movie quality
option
option
option
optionoption
3
3
3
33
Press the confi
Press the confi
Press the confi
Press the confiPress the confirmation bu
rmation bu
rmation bu
rmation burmation button to
tton to
tton to
tton to tton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
The selected movie quality will be
displayed in the LCD monitor
(p.42).
• The movie quality setting is
retained in memory even if the
power is turned off.
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
RecordiRecording Movi
ng Movi
ng Movi
ng Moving Movies for
es for
es for
es for es for
Wide-S
Wide-S
Wide-S
Wide-SWide-Screen TV
creen TV
creen TV
creen TVcreen TVs
s
s
s s
(16:9)
(16:9)
(16:9)
(16:9)(16:9)
If you intend to view recorded movies
on a wide-screen TV (aspect ratio
16:9), set “16:9” to “On” before
recording. (When “16:9” is set to
“Off”, movies are recorded in 4:3
aspect ratio.)
The image appearing on the LCD
screen differs according to the “16:9”
setting as follows.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR
-RW (VR
-RW (VR
-RW (VR-RW (VR)
)
)
)) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

76
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Turning “16:9” Mode On/
Off
When “16:9” mode is On
(Aspect ratio: 16:9)
When “16:9” mode is Off
(Aspect ratio: 4:3)
1
1
1
11 During record paus
During record paus
During record paus
During record pausDuring record pause, press
e, press
e, press
e, press e, press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup” Select “Record Functions Setup”
“16:9”
“16:9”
“16:9”
“16:9” “16:9” “On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”
“On”/“Off”“On”/“Off”
3
3
3
33
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirmaPress the confirmation button to
tion button to
tion button to
tion button to tion button to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, thenconfirm, then
MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
• The “16:9” setting is retained
in memory even when the
power is turned off.
4
4
4
44
• If you intend to view recorded
movies on a non wide-screen
TV, set “16:9” to “Off” before
recording. Otherwise, the
recorded images appearing on
the TV will be vertically
distorted as shown in the
illustration below.
• If you play back movies
recorded in “16:9 Off” mode
on this camcorder, black bands
will appear on both sides of the
LCD screen.
Notes
• If “Input Source” is set to
“LINE”, movies are recorded in
“16:9 Off” mode even if “16:9” is
set to “On”.
• When using DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R/+RW, you cannot
set “16:9” to “On” if “VIDEO
Mode” is set to “STD”. If you
change the “VIDEO Mode”
setting from “XTRA”/“FINE” to
“STD” while “16:9” is set to
“On”, “16:9” will be set to “Off”
automatically and the aspect ratio
of the image on the LCD screen
will become 4:3.

77
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Switching still picture
quality
• When using DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R, you cannot set
“Input Source” to “LINE” after
recording movies in “16:9 On”
mode.
• When using DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R, you cannot
change the “16:9” setting in the
middle of the disc.
• The “16:9” setting is only for
movie recording and does not
affect playback or still picture
recording. (Movies are played
back in recorded aspect ratio and
still pictures are always recorded
in 4:3 aspect ratio.)
• This mode does not support the
ID-1/ID-2 system*.
* The system that records the
information of aspect ratio (16:9/
4:3) in the gaps between video
signals.
• If you connect the camcorder to
your TV’s S1 or S2 input
terminal, the TV will be switched
to wide mode automatically. For
details, refer to your TV’s
instruction manual. (Note that if
connected by way of a video
selector, the TV may not be
switched to wide mode
automatically.)
• If you connect the camcorder to a
TV that supports only 4:3 aspect
ratio display and play a DVD
recorded in “16:9” mode, the
image will appear vertically
distorted on the TV screen. In this
case, set the “TV type” setting of
the camcorder to “4:3” (p.117).
Changing Stil
Changing Stil
Changing Stil
Changing StilChanging Still Picture
l Picture
l Picture
l Picture l Picture
Quality (
Quality (
Quality (
Quality (Quality (Quality)
Quality)
Quality)
Quality)Quality)
You can change the still picture
recording quality.
It is recommended that you choose
“FINE” for important recording
(“Still picture size and quality”
(p.177)).
1
1
1
11 During record pau
During record pau
During record pau
During record pauDuring record pause
se
se
sese, press
, press
, press
, press , press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions SetupSelect “Record Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“Quality”
“Quality”
“Quality”
“Quality”“Quality”
a still q
a still q
a still q
a still q a still quality opt
uality opt
uality opt
uality optuality option
ion
ion
ionion
3
3
3
33
Press the confi
Press the confi
Press the confi
Press the confiPress the confirmation bu
rmation bu
rmation bu
rmation burmation button to
tton to
tton to
tton to tton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
• The still quality setting is retained
in memory even if the power is
turned off.
• If you play a +RW recorded in
“16:9” using a DVD player/
recorder, in some cases the image
on the 16:9 TV screen will be
vertically distorted. In this case,
change the related setting of the
DVD player/recorder (refer to
your DVD player/recorder’
instruction manual). Or use the
camcorder of which “TV type”
setting set to “4:3” (p.117) to play
back.
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

78
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Switching the
camcorder to external
input mode
Inputt
Inputt
Inputt
InputtInputting Au
ing Au
ing Au
ing Auing Audio and
dio and
dio and
dio and dio and
Video
Video
Video
Video Video Signals
Signals
Signals
SignalsSignals From
From
From
From From an
an
an
an an
Extern
Extern
Extern
ExternExternal Devi
al Devi
al Devi
al Devial Device
ce
ce
cece
(Input
(Input
(Input
(Input(Input Source
Source
Source
Source Source)
)
)
))
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS(DZ-HS903A)
903A)
903A)
903A)903A)
You can input audio and video signals
from an external device connected to
the camcorder by changing the
camcorder’s setting.
See “Dubbing from another A/V
device (DZ-HS903A)” (p.122) on
how to connect to an external device
and record images from it.
(The DZ-HS803A does not have an
external input feature.)
Input
Source Purpose
On-screen
display
(p.42)
CAMERA For normal use of
the camcorder —
LINE For external input L IN
1
1
1
11 During record paus
During record paus
During record paus
During record pausDuring record pause, press
e, press
e, press
e, press e, press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup”
Select “Record Functions Setup”Select “Record Functions Setup”
“Input Source”
“Input Source”
“Input Source”
“Input Source” “Input Source”
“CAMERA
“CAMERA
“CAMERA
“CAMERA“CAMERA”/“LINE”
”/“LINE”
”/“LINE”
”/“LINE””/“LINE”
3
3
3
33
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirma
Press the confirmaPress the confirmation button to
tion button to
tion button to
tion button to tion button to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, thenconfirm, then
MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
• When the power is turned off,
the “Input Source” setting
returns to “CAMERA”.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Changin
Changin
Changin
ChanginChanging Capturing
g Capturing
g Capturing
g Capturingg Capturing
Still Pictur
Still Pictur
Still Pictur
Still PicturStill Picture Quality for
e Quality for
e Quality for
e Quality for e Quality for
External Input
External Input
External Input
External InputExternal Input
(PHOTO I
(PHOTO I
(PHOTO I
(PHOTO I(PHOTO Input)
nput)
nput)
nput)nput)
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS
(DZ-HS(DZ-HS903A)
903A)
903A)
903A)903A)
When using a card and “Input
Source” is set to “LINE” (see the left
column), you can capture a still
picture from the movie incoming
from the connected external device
using the same method explained on
p.56.
You can choose either of the two
capture qualities (only for a movie
from an external device) as shown in
the table below.
PHOTO
Input Explanation
On-screen
display
(p.42)
Frame
High quality and
suitable for a movie
that does not
contain much
movement. If you
choose this option
for a movie with
much movement,
the captured image
may be blurred.
Field
Select this option for
a movie with more
action to reduce the
chance of capturing
a blurred image.
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

79
V
V
V
VVarious
arious
arious
ariousarious Recordi
Recordi
Recordi
Recordi Recording T
ng T
ng T
ng Tng Techn
echn
echn
echnechniques
iques
iques
iquesiques
Switching capture
quality
1
1
1
11 Duri
Duri
Duri
DuriDuring r
ng r
ng r
ng rng rec
ec
ec
ececord
ord
ord
ord ord paus
paus
paus
pauspause, pres
e, pres
e, pres
e, prese, press
s
s
s s MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions SetupSelect “Record Functions Setup”
”
”
””
“PHO
“PHO
“PHO
“PHO “PHOT
T
T
TTO Input”
O Input”
O Input”
O Input”O Input”
“F
“F
“F
“F“Fr
r
r
rrame”/“Field”
ame”/“Field”
ame”/“Field”
ame”/“Field”ame”/“Field”
3
3
3
33 Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation but
irmation but
irmation but
irmation butirmation button to
ton to
ton to
ton to ton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to end.
to end.
to end.
to end. to end.
Using the
Using the
Using the
Using theUsing the Self-Time
Self-Time
Self-Time
Self-Time Self-Timer
r
r
rr
You can use the self-timer to record
still photos.
1
1
1
11 During stil
During stil
During stil
During stilDuring still picture record
l picture record
l picture record
l picture recordl picture record pause
pause
pause
pause pause,
,
,
, ,
press
press
press
press press MENU.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions Setup
Select “Record Functions SetupSelect “Record Functions Setup”
”
”
” ”
“Self T
“Self T
“Self T
“Self T“Self Timer”
imer”
imer”
imer” imer” “On”
“On”
“On”
“On” “On”
3
3
3
33
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the conf
Press the confPress the confirmation but
irmation but
irmation but
irmation butirmation button to
ton to
ton to
ton to ton to
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then
confirm, then confirm, then MENU to exit the
to exit the
to exit the
to exit the to exit the
Menu.
Menu.
Menu.
Menu.Menu.
The self-timer is set and “
q
10”
appears in the LCD monitor
(p.42)
.
Hint
You can confirm the current
“PHOTO Input” mode by the icon
appearing on the LCD screen
(p.42).
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
4
4
4
44
Press
Press
Press
Press Press PHOTO/SELECT halfw
halfw
halfw
halfw halfwa
a
a
aay
y
y
y y
to adjust the focus
to adjust the focus
to adjust the focus
to adjust the focusto adjust the focus, then press it all
, then press it all
, then press it all
, then press it all , then press it all
the wa
the wa
the wa
the wathe way down.
y down.
y down.
y down.y down.
A countdown starts. In the LCD
monitor, the countdown is
shown as follows: “
q
10”, “
q
9”,
…. The photo will be recorded
about 10 seconds later.
During countdown, the
recording indicator on the lens
side also flashes.
• To cancel the countdown and
return to “
q
10”, press
PHOTO/SELECT or C
C
C
CC.
• The self-timer operates every
time PHOTO/SELECT is
fully pressed and will not be
set to “Off” until the following
is conducted:
– Set the self-timer to “Off” in
the Menu.
– Turn off the power.
– Switch to movie recording.

80
This camcorder allows you to choose
from four options when dubbing images
recorded on HDD to a DVD.
Dubbing options
•“New”
Among the scenes recorded to the
HDD, scenes which have not yet been
dubbed to DVD are dubbed in order
from the first scene.
•“Date”
Dubs all scenes recorded on the HDD
on the same date to a DVD, beginning
with the first scene.
•“All”
Dubs all scenes recorded on the HDD
to a DVD, beginning with the first
scene.
•“Select”
You can select your favorite scenes
from all those recorded on the HDD,
for dubbing.
Time required for
dubbing
Required time estimates for dubbing
scenes approx. 30 minutes long are as
follows:
*1 Excluding time for finalization
*2 Two DVDs are needed.
Before you begin
zPrepare a recordable disc (p.31).
zBe sure to use the AC adapter/
charger to power the camcorder
during dubbing. Dubbing is not
possible with a battery connected.
zIf power is turned off and dubbing
is interrupted midway, proper
dubbing will not be possible.
zFor details on the recording time
for a scene that can be dubbed on
one disc, see "Storage capacity of
HDD/DVD/Card" (p.175).
Hints for dubbing
zThe maximum number of scenes
that can be dubbed will vary
depending on the DVD used
(p.176).
zDub marks “ ” appear for the
thumbnails of the scenes which
have already been dubbed.
zSet the “Category” to “Un
Dubbed” if you wish to select only
the scenes on the HDD that has not
been dubbed yet.
VIDEO Mode Required time* 1
XTRA
Approx. 23 mins.*
2
FINE
Approx. 15 mins.
STD
Approx. 8 mins.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD
Dubbing on DVD

81
zWith this camcorder, the scenes on
the HDD will be dubbed to a DVD
in the order they are displayed on
HDD Disc Navigation screen. To
dub the scenes in a different order,
create a playlist in which the scenes
are registered in the desired order
of dubbing (p.96), and then execute
dubbing.
zIf you combine scenes with
different recording dates on a
playlist, and dub the combined
scene to a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW
(VR mode), the scenes will be
dubbed separately for each date.
However, if a combined scene is
subsequently divided, the scenes
may not be dubbed separately for
each date.
zIf you divide a scene using the
“Edit” function, and then dub both
the divided scenes to a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW, the
scene will be dubbed as one scene,
without the division.
zIf you dub scenes combined using
the “Edit” function to a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW, the two
scenes immediately before the
combination (sometimes more than
two scenes) will be dubbed.
zThe effects applied to the scenes on
the HDD will not be passed to the
scenes dubbed on a DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R/+RW.
zA DVD-RW/DVD-R dubbed on
this camcorder will not be
automatically finalized. To play it
back on a DVD player/recorder, be
sure to finalize it on this camcorder
first.
zThe time shown during dubbing is
approximate. If the number of
scenes on the HDD is too large, or
the temperature of the camcorder
becomes too high, the required
recording time may be longer than
the time indicated on the screen.
zPlease note that Hitachi will not
accept any responsibility for
compensation for loss of data, or
direct or indirect damage if
dubbing is not performed normally
due to a fault in this camcorder.
zWe recommend first confirming
that the dubbed disc can be played
back normally before deleting
scenes on the HDD dubbed.

82
This option allows you to dub scenes
which were recorded to the HDD and
have not yet been dubbed to DVD.
First
First
First
FirstFirst Dubbi
Dubbi
Dubbi
Dubbi Dubbing (“Ne
ng (“Ne
ng (“Ne
ng (“Neng (“New”)
w”)
w”)
w”)w”)
1
1
1
11 • Dubbing is not possible if a
battery pack is used as a power
source.
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
DUBBING
The dubbing menu appears.
4
4
4
44
5
5
5
55
New All
SelectDate
EXIT
Dubbing the scene which
isn't dubbed in HDD.
D u b b in g M e n u
ENTER
6
6
6
66
If you are using a DVD-RW (VF
mode) or DVD-R, you can
finalize the disc continuously
after dubbing is complete.
Select “YES” to finalize or “NO”
not to finalize.
7
7
7
77
Dubbing starts.
8
8
8
88
9
9
9
99 • If you wish to erase the dubbed
scenes, select “YES”.
• If you wish to leave them on the
HDD, select “NO”.
10
10
10
1010 • Or press C to end.
• You can also display the
Dubbing Menu from the Disc
Navigation screen. Press ,
press MENU, select “Scene”
“Dubbing” “Dubbing
Menu”, and then press the
confirmation button.
• If you want to use “New”
dubbing for a dubbed scene,
clear the dub marks (p.86).

83
This option allows you to collectively
dub all scenes recorded on the HDD
on the same day.
Dubb
Dubb
Dubb
DubbDubbing All
ing All
ing All
ing Alling All Scenes
Scenes
Scenes
Scenes Scenes
Record
Record
Record
RecordRecorded on th
ed on th
ed on th
ed on thed on the Same
e Same
e Same
e Same e Same
Day (“Date”)
Day (“Date”)
Day (“Date”)
Day (“Date”)Day (“Date”)
1
1
1
11 • Dubbing is not possible if a
battery pack is used as a power
source.
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
DUBBING
The Dubbing Menu appears.
4
4
4
44
The “Select Date” screen
appears.
5
5
5
55
6
6
6
66
S e l e c t D a t e
0 3
1 2 / 1 0 / 2 0 0 8
0 1
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
0 2
1 2 / 5 / 2 0 0 8
ENTER
0 4
1 2 / 1 5 / 2 0 0 8
7
7
7
77
If you are using a DVD-RW (VF
mode) or DVD-R, you can
finalize the disc continuously
after dubbing is complete.
Select “YES” to finalize or
“NO” not to finalize.
8
8
8
88
Dubbing starts.
9
9
9
99
10
10
10
1010 • If you wish to erase the dubbed
scenes, select “YES”.
• If you wish to leave them on
the HDD, select “NO”.
11
11
11
1111 • Or press C to end.
You can also display the Dubbing
Menu from the Disc Navigation
screen. Press , press MENU,
select “Scene” “Dubbing”
“Dubbing Menu”, and then press
the confirmation button.

84
You can dub all scenes recorded on
the HDD from the beginning in
sequence.
Dubbing
Dubbing
Dubbing
DubbingDubbing All Scenes
All Scenes
All Scenes
All Scenes All Scenes
Recorded
Recorded
Recorded
RecordedRecorded on the
on the
on the
on the on the HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD HDD
(“All
(“All
(“All
(“All(“All”)
”)
”)
”)”)
1
1
1
11 • Dubbing is not possible if a
battery pack is used as a power
source.
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
DUBBING
The Dubbing Menu appears.
4
4
4
44 The “Dubbing(All)” screen
appears.
5
5
5
55
6
6
6
66
If you are using a DVD-RW (VF
mode) or DVD-R, you can
finalize the disc continuously
after dubbing is complete.
Select “YES” to finalize or “NO”
not to finalize.
7
7
7
77
Dubbing starts.
8
8
8
88
9
9
9
99 • If you wish to erase the dubbed
scenes, select “YES”.
• If you wish to leave them on the
HDD, select “NO”.
10
10
10
1010 • Or press C to end.
You can also display the Dubbing
Menu from the Disc Navigation
screen. Press , press MENU,
select “Scene” “Dubbing”
“Dubbing Menu”, and then press
the confirmation button.

85
You can select your favorite scenes
from all those recorded on the HDD,
for dubbing.
Dubbi
Dubbi
Dubbi
DubbiDubbing Scen
ng Scen
ng Scen
ng Scenng Scenes
es
es
es es
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelected (“S
ed (“S
ed (“S
ed (“Sed (“Select”
elect”
elect”
elect”elect”)
)
)
))
1
1
1
11 • Dubbing is not possible if a
battery pack is used as a power
source.
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
DUBBING
The Dubbing Menu appears.
4
4
4
44
5
5
5
55
6
6
6
66
• You can choose multiple
scenes.
• You can also use PHOTO/
SELECT to choose a scene.
7
7
7
77
DUBBING
D u b b in g (Se l e c t )
ENTER SELECT
DUB
DVD remaining bar
8
8
8
88
If you are using a DVD-RW (VF
mode) or DVD-R, you can
finalize the disc continuously
after dubbing is complete.
Select “YES” to finalize or “NO”
not to finalize.
9
9
9
99
Dubbing starts.
10
10
10
1010 • If you wish to erase the dubbed
scenes, select “YES”.
• If you wish to leave them on the
HDD, select “NO”.
11
11
11
1111 • Or press C to end.
You can also display the Dubbing
Menu from the Disc Navigation
screen. Press , press MENU,
select “Scene” “Dubbing”
“Dubbing Menu”, and then press
the confirmation button.

86
You can display all scenes recorded
on the HDD according to their dubbed
status.
“All”
All scenes will be displayed in
chronological order of recording
regardless of whether they have been
dubbed or not.
“Dubbed”
Only scenes with the “ ” dub
mark will be displayed in
chronological order of recording.
“Un Dubbed”
Only scenes without the “ ” dub
mark will be displayed in
chronological order of recording.
You can use “New” dubbing again by
clearing the dub mark “ ”.
Displaying
Displaying
Displaying
DisplayingDisplaying only D
only D
only D
only D only Dubb
ubb
ubb
ubbubbed or
ed or
ed or
ed or ed or
Not
Not
Not
NotNot Dubbed
Dubbed
Dubbed
Dubbed Dubbed Scen
Scen
Scen
Scen Scenes
es
es
es es
(Ca
(Ca
(Ca
(Ca(Category
tegory
tegory
tegorytegory)
)
)
))
1
1
1
11
MENU
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33 • The Category setting will return
to “All” if you exit the disc
navigation screen.
Clea
Clea
Clea
CleaClearing the du
ring the du
ring the du
ring the during the dub m
b m
b m
b mb marks
arks
arks
arksarks
on Thumbn
on Thumbn
on Thumbn
on Thumbnon Thumbnail
ail
ail
ailails
s
s
ss
(MARK
(MARK
(MARK
(MARK(MARK OFF)
OFF)
OFF)
OFF) OFF)
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
PHOTO/SELECT
MENU
•You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
3
3
3
33
• If you do not need to change the
scenes, press the confirmation
button.
4
4
4
44
C
C
C
CC
ENTER RETURN
Du bb ing Ma r k O f f
E x e c u t e
Sce ne

87
By using the and MENU buttons,
you can also edit recorded scenes. The
following edit functions are available
on the camcorder.
The following are the functions that
enable you to play back the scenes as
if they were edited without changing
the original data.
z
You can play back scenes by
specifying the desired recording date.
The scenes are played sequentially
from the earliest one of the date.
z
You can create a playlist by gathering
your favorite scenes to play back.
You can also delete or add scenes on
the created playlist.
z
There are special effect Fade (p.106)
and convenient functions Skip (p.107)
and Thumbnail (p.108) under the
“Effect” category.
z
z
z
z
You can jump to the first or last scene
among all scenes on the selected
medium.
z
You can choose a scene and check its
recording date and time, image
quality, length (for movie), and
settings.
z
To avoid accidental deletion, you can
choose stills and lock them. (You can
also select all stills and lock them all.)
z
You can erase all data from the
selected medium.

88
After pressing
MENU
on the disc navigation screen, you can use following functions.
Menu It
Menu It
Menu It
Menu ItMenu Items for th
ems for th
ems for th
ems for thems for the Disc Navi
e Disc Navi
e Disc Navi
e Disc Navie Disc Navigatio
gatio
gatio
gatiogation
n
n
nn
Editing zzz S
S
S
SS
*1
You can delete unnecessary
scenes, combine scenes, or divide
one scene.
p.102
Applying
“Effect” settings
to movies
zzz
You can apply fade effect/skip
setting to a movie and alter still
images registered to thumbnails.
p.106
–108
Copying from a
DVD-RAM to a
card
z
You can copy photos recorded on
a DVD-RAM to a card set in the
camcorder. (Note that this
camcorder cannot record stills
on a DVD-RAM.)
p.109
Scene lock z
You can lock any scene so that it
will not be deleted by mistake.
p.110
Information
display z z z z z z z
You can display information on
one scene or multiple scenes,
such as image quality, recording
time, etc.
p.111
Changing
Program/
Playlist title
zzz
You can change Program/
Playlist titles originally
automatically generated
according to date (and also time
and sequential number for
Playlist).
p.93
p.101
Creating a
playlist zzz
You can create an original movie
by changing the playback order
of scenes.
p.96
Initialization z z z z z z
You can delete all data recorded
on the HDD/DVD/Card.
p.112
Protection zzz
You can protect the HDD or a
disc to prevent deletion or editing
by mistake.
p.113
Unprotection zzz
You can cancel the protection.
p.113
Remaining
display
(Capacity)
z z z z z z z
The remaining recordable movie
time or number of recordable
stills is displayed.
p.114

89
*1 Only deletion is possible
*2 Additional recording can be made on a finalized DVD-RW (VR mode).
Finalization z*2 zzz
You can use this camcorder to
finalize any DVD-RW/DVD-R
disc recorded on it so that the
disc can be viewed on another
compatible DVD player or
device.
p.120
Unfinalization z z
You can unfinalize a DVD-RW
(VF mode) that was finalized on
this camcorder so that additional
videos can be recorded on the
disc.
p.121
Repeat play z z z z z z
You can play back scenes
repeatedly.
p.56
Slide show z
You can play back stills in
succession.
p.55
Adding special effects to movies is a capability of this camcorder. If you play
a disc with effects set on this camcorder on another DVD recorder/player or
copy such movies to your PC, the set effects will not be reflected. To copy
movies to a disc with the effects playable using other DVD player/recorder,
see "Dubbing from the camcorder to another A/V device" (p.124).

90
After pressing
MENU
on the disc navigation screen, the Menu screen appears. The Menu
varies depending on the medium as shown below.
To operate the Menu, use
d
/
c
/
f
/
e
. See "How to Operate the Menu" (p.57).
z
(•: Quick Menu items)
Scene
Edit
Delete
(p.102)
•
Divide
(p.103)
•
Combine
(p.105)
Move*
1
Effect
Fade
(p.106)
•
Skip
(p.107)
Thumbnail
(p.108)
Dubbing*
2
(p.80)
Execute
•
Mark Off
(p.86)
•
Copy*
3
(p.109)
•
Select
(p.49)
Start
→
Current
Current
→
End
All
Detail
(p.111)
PlayList
(p.96)
Select
Play
Create
Edit
Title
Delete
Program
(p.92)
Select
Play
Title
Go To
(p.109)
Top
End
*1 This menu item appears only while
playlist is displayed.
*2 HDD only
*3 DVD-RAM only
*4 DVD-RW (VR mode) only
HDD
Setting/
DVD
Setting
Finalize DVD*
4
(p.118)
•
Format HDD/DVD
(p.112)
•
Protect HDD/DVD
(p.113)
Unprotect HDD/DVD
(p.113)
Capacity
(p.114)
Update Control Info.
(p.162)
Full Format*
2
(p.171)
Others
Category*
2
(p.86)
All
Dubbed
Un Dubbed
Category*
3
(p.114)
All
VIDEO
PHOTO
Repeat
Play
(p.56)
On
•
Off
•
TV type
(p.117)
16:9
•
4:3
•

91
z
(•:Quick Menu items)
z
(•:Quick Menu items)
Scene Select
(p.49)
Start
→
Current
Current
→
End
All
Detail
(p.111)
Program
(p.92)
Select
Play
Go To
(p.109)
Top
End
* DVD-RW (VF mode)/+RW only
DVD
Setting
Finalize DVD
(p.118)
•
Unfinalize DVD*
(p.121)
•
Format DVD*
(p.112)
•
Capacity
(p.114)
Others
Repeat Play
(p.56)
On
•
Off
•
TV type
(p.117)
16:9
•
4:3
•
Scene
Delete
(p.102)
•
Lock
(p.110)
Select
(p.49)
Start
→
Current
Current
→
End
All
Detail
(p.111)
Go To
(p.109)
Top
End
Card
Setting
Format Card
(p.112)
•
Capacity
(p.114)
Slide Show
(p.55)
Start
•

92
A program is an assembly of scenes recorded on the same date, regardless of
whether they are movies or stills.
Choosing
Choosing
Choosing
ChoosingChoosing Scenes b
Scenes b
Scenes b
Scenes b Scenes by Prog
y Prog
y Prog
y Progy Program
ram
ram
ramram
Recorded on December 1
Scene No.1 Scene No.2 Scene No.3 Scene No.4 Scene No.5 Scene No.6
Movie 9:00AM Movie 10:20AM Still 11:45AM Still 1:30PM Movie 5:20PM Still 8:00PM
P
lays back in the order
f
rom the earliest
r
ecorded scene
1
1
1
11
MENU
2
2
2
22 The “Select Program” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
The disc navigation screen of the
selected program will appear.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
S e l e c t P r o g r a
m
01
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
02 1 2 / 1 0 / 2 0 0 8
A l l P r o g r a
m
s
ENTER RETURN
03
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8
Program
ENTER RETURN
Select
Play
Title
0 01 / 00 80 3
12 / 2 0
/ 2008
PLAY PHOTO SELECT
• Pressing C on the “Select
Program” screen will restore the
disc navigation screen.
• If a disc recorded on another
device is loaded in this camcorder,
the program may not necessarily
be a collection of recordings made
on the same date.
• When using a +RW, if you change
the movie quality (VIDEO Mode)
or wide mode (16:9) setting,
programs are separately produced
even if they are recorded on the
same date.

93
Playing back a
program (Play)
Renaming the title of
a program (Title)
Program titles are automatically
generated according to the date of
recording. You can rename the
program titles as you like.
1
1
1
11
MENU
2
2
2
22 The “Start Program” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33 Playback begins from the first
scene of the selected program.
1
1
1
11
MENU
2
2
2
22 The “Program Title” screen
appears.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Hint
If “Repeat Play” is set to “On”
(p.56), the selected program will
be repeatedly played.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR)
3
3
3
33
The title entry screen appears.
4
4
4
44
The selected character is entered.
Repeat this procedure to create a
title. Up to 20 characters can be
input.
• There are the following three
input modes. To change input
mode, press DISPLAY
repeatedly.
1: Capital letter mode
2: Small letter mode
P r o g r a
m T i t l e
ENTER RETURN
01
1 2 / 1 / 20 08
02 1 2 / 1 0 / 20 0 8
03
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8
INPUT DELETE SELECT
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8T I T L E
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
À È Ì Ò Ù Á É Í Ó Ú Ã Ñ Õ
Â Ê Î Ô Û Ä Ë Ï Ö Ü Ç
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE
1 C a n c e l
P H O T O
E n t e r
Title input bar
Input mode
Palette for selecting
characters
CHANGE DELETE SELECT
TITLE
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
ÀÈ Ì ÒÙÁÉ Í ÓÚÃÑÕ
ÂÊ Î ÔÛÄË Ï ÖÜÇ
1C a n c e l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8
E n t e r
P H O T O
CHANGE DELETE SELECT
TITLE
a b c d e f g h i j l mk
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
à è ì ò ù á é í ó ú ã ñ õ
â ê î ô û ä ë ï ö ü ç ß
2C a n c e l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8
E n t e r
P H O T O

94
3: Symbol mode
• To delete a character from the
title input bar, press C. If you
press and hold C
C
C
CC, all the letters
will be deleted.
(You can also use the DELETE
button of the remote control.)
5
5
5
55
The confirmation screen appears.
• To cancel the entry to restore the
original title, position the cursor
to “Cancel”, then press the
confirmation button. Then the
confirmation screen appears.
Select “YES”, then press the
confirmation button.
CHANGE DELETE SELECT
TITLE
3C a n c e l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE
1 2 / 2 0 / 20 08
E n t e r
P H O T O
ENTER DELETE SELECT
TITLE
a b c d e f g h i j l mk
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
à è ì ò ù á é í ó ú ã ñ õ
â ê î ô û ä ë ï ö ü ç ß
2E n t e r C a n c e l
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SPACE
a t a Pa r k
P H O T O
6
6
6
66
The disc navigation screen of the
selected program appears.
• To cancel, select “NO” and press
the confirmation button, or
simply press C.
The screen returns to step 4.
Note
Titles set on this camcorder may not
be visible on other devices.
ENTER
F i n i s h t i t l e s e t t i n g ?
T I T L E a t a Pa r k
YES NO
Hints for character entry
(in step 4)
• You can change the cursor
position by pressing PHOTO/
SELECT or the cursor buttons
repeatedly as follows:
Title input bar → Character
select palette → Input mode
selector → “Cancel”.
• As an alternative method of using
DISPLAY for changing input
mode, position the cursor on the
input mode selector, then press the
confirmation button repeatedly.

95
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
What is “Playlist”?
Up to 99 playlists can be created, and up to 999 scenes can be included in each
playlist.
Playlist
Playlist
Playlist
PlaylistPlaylist
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (
-RW (
-RW (
-RW (-RW (VR)
VR)
VR)
VR)VR)
A Playlist is a compilation of scenes from various movies. You can create a
Playlist on this camcorder by gathering your favorite scenes.
Since a Playlist is not created by copying data, very little HDD/DVD space is
required to make one. Note, likewise, that deleting scenes from a Playlist will
not increase the remaining HDD/DVD capacity for recording.
12/1/2008 12/10/2008
Playlist 1 created

96
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Creating a new
Playlist (Create)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the scene
the scene
the scene
the scene the scene to be i
to be i
to be i
to be i to be included i
ncluded i
ncluded i
ncluded included in the
n the
n the
n the n the
playlist
playlist
playlist
playlistplaylist, then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also select multiple
scenes at the same time (p.49).
3
3
3
33
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “Play
t “Play
t “Play
t “Playt “PlayList”
List”
List”
List”List”
“C
“C
“C
“C “Create”
reate”
reate”
reate”reate”, then
, then
, then
, then, then
press t
press t
press t
press tpress the confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation buthe confirmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
4
4
4
44
If
If
If
IfIf you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t you do not need to change t
o change t
o change t
o change to change the
he
he
he he
scene(s), pr
scene(s), pr
scene(s), pr
scene(s), prscene(s), press the confir
ess the confir
ess the confir
ess the confiress the confirmation
mation
mation
mation mation
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
When creation is complete, the
created Playlist will appear on the
Disc Navigation Playlist screen.
The camcorder automatically
generates the Playlist title from the
date, time, and sequential number
of Playlist creations.
• You can rename the Playlist title
as you like (p.101).
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
Hints
• The scenes that make up a
playlist are not actually copied,
but are linked from their original
data. Deleting a scene from a
playlist will not delete the
original data (scenes) from the
HDD or disc. Likewise, editing
scenes on a playlist will not
affect the original data (scenes).
• If a scene has the fade or skip
setting, or a dub mark “ ”,
that information will also be
added to the playlist.
• You can add other scenes or
remove unnecessary scenes to/
from the created playlist (p.98–
p.99).
Note
If free space available on the HDD/
DVD is insufficient, creation of a
new playlist may not be possible.
Delete unnecessary scenes.

97
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Displaying a desired
Playlist (PlayList)
After selecting the desired playlist, the
disc navigation screen will appear.
z
Editing a playlist
The procedures for editing playlists
are the same as editing a program or
scenes. Refer to the following pages
for scene dubbing/editing to apply the
same procedures to dub/edit a playlist.
Dubbing...................................p.80
Dividing a scene ......................p.103
Deleting scene .........................p.102
Combining scenes....................p.105
Arranging order of scenes .......p.101
(only on playlist)
Adding fade.............................p.106
Setting skip..............................p.107
Altering a thumbnail image.....p.108
Renaming a title.......................p.93
Playing back a Playlist
(Play)
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Pl
ct “Pl
ct “Pl
ct “Plct “PlayLis
ayLis
ayLis
ayLisayList”
t”
t”
t” t” “Sel
“Sel
“Sel
“Sel “Select”
ect”
ect”
ect”ect”, then
, then
, then
, then , then
press the
press the
press the
press thepress the confir
confir
confir
confir confirmation butt
mation butt
mation butt
mation buttmation button.
on.
on.
on.on.
The “Select PlayList” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the pla
the pla
the pla
the pla the playlist yo
ylist yo
ylist yo
ylist yoylist you w
u w
u w
u wu want t
ant t
ant t
ant tant to display,
o display,
o display,
o display, o display,
then
then
then
thenthen press the
press the
press the
press the press the confir
confir
confir
confir confirmatio
matio
matio
matiomation butto
n butto
n butto
n button button.
n.
n.
n.n.
The disc navigation screen of the
selected playlist will be displayed.
Hint
To return the disc navigation
screen to let it show all recorded
scenes, select “PlayList”
“All
Programs”.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “
ect “
ect “
ect “ect “Pla
Pla
Pla
PlaPlayLis
yLis
yLis
yLisyList”
t”
t”
t”t” “Pl
“Pl
“Pl
“Pl “Play”
ay”
ay”
ay”ay”, the
, the
, the
, the, then pr
n pr
n pr
n prn press
ess
ess
essess
the confi
the confi
the confi
the confithe confirmation
rmation
rmation
rmation rmation button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The “Start PlayList” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the Pl
the Pl
the Pl
the Pl the Playlist
aylist
aylist
aylistaylist to be pla
to be pla
to be pla
to be pla to be played, the
yed, the
yed, the
yed, theyed, then
n
n
n n
press the
press the
press the
press thepress the confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati confirmation butt
on butt
on butt
on button button.
on.
on.
on.on.
Playback begins from the first
scene of the selected Playlist.
• To stop playback before a
Playlist finishes, press C. The
disc navigation screen of the
current Playlist will appear.
Hint
If “Repeat Play” is set to “On”
(p.56), the selected Playlist will be
repeatedly played.

98
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Adding scenes to a
Playlist (Edit)
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “PlayL
t “PlayL
t “PlayL
t “PlayLt “PlayList”
ist”
ist”
ist” ist” “E
“E
“E
“E “Edit”, the
dit”, the
dit”, the
dit”, thedit”, then press
n press
n press
n pressn press
the co
the co
the co
the cothe confirma
nfirma
nfirma
nfirmanfirmation b
tion b
tion b
tion btion button
utton
utton
uttonutton.
.
.
..
The “Edit PlayList” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Select t
Select t
Select t
Select tSelect the playl
he playl
he playl
he playlhe playlist you want to edit,
ist you want to edit,
ist you want to edit,
ist you want to edit, ist you want to edit,
then pre
then pre
then pre
then prethen press the confi
ss the confi
ss the confi
ss the confiss the confirmation but
rmation but
rmation but
rmation butrmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
The “Edit PlayList” screen
appears. The upper “All
Programs” row shows available
scenes. And the lower “PlayList
No.xx” row shows the contents of
the Playlist selected.
4
4
4
44
Move
Move
Move
MoveMove the cu
the cu
the cu
the cu the cursor to th
rsor to th
rsor to th
rsor to thrsor to the low
e low
e low
e lowe lower row
er row
er row
er rower row by
by
by
by by
pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing
e
e
e
ee
and selec
and selec
and selec
and selec and select the inser
t the inser
t the inser
t the insert the insertion
tion
tion
tion tion
positi
positi
positi
positiposition using
on using
on using
on using on using
d
d
d
dd
/
/
/
//
c
c
c
cc
.
.
.
..
5
5
5
55
Move the cur
Move the cur
Move the cur
Move the curMove the cursor to t
sor to t
sor to t
sor to tsor to the upper
he upper
he upper
he upper he upper row by
row by
row by
row by row by
pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing
f
f
f
ff
and choose a scene
and choose a scene
and choose a scene
and choose a scene and choose a scene you
you
you
you you
wish to add by pressing
wish to add by pressing
wish to add by pressing
wish to add by pressing wish to add by pressing
d
d
d
dd
/
/
/
//
c
c
c
cc
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
6
6
6
66
Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation buthe confirmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
• Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add other
scenes.
Ed i t P l a yL i s t
P l a y L i s t N o . 0 1
A l l P r o g r a
ms
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
008/008
ADD
PHOTO SELECT
The green “I” mark shows
the insertion position.
Scene to be added
7
7
7
77
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen whether
to end appears.
Hints
• Pressing C in the middle of
adding scenes will display the
exit confirmation screen. Select
“YES” to exit. Select “NO” to
restore the “Edit PlayList”
screen.
• Each time you press DISPLAY,
the operation guide, the
recording date/time of the
selected scene, movie quality
(VIDEO Mode), screen aspect
ratio, and the recording length
(when using HDD) will appear.
• If you press MENU in step 4 or
5, the Submenu screen for
editing the Playlist will appear.
You can also use this Submenu
(p.103).
• If you add a scene with a dub
mark, the mark will also appear
on the scene in the playlist.

99
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Deleting scenes from
Playlist (Edit)
Adding scenes using
the Submenu for
Editing (Edit)
You can add other scenes to a Playlist
using the “Edit” menu screen.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Disp
Disp
Disp
DispDisplay the “
lay the “
lay the “
lay the “lay the “Edit Play
Edit Play
Edit Play
Edit PlayEdit PlayList” sc
List” sc
List” sc
List” scList” screen o
reen o
reen o
reen oreen of
f
f
f f
the pla
the pla
the pla
the plathe playlist yo
ylist yo
ylist yo
ylist yoylist you wish to delet
u wish to delet
u wish to delet
u wish to deletu wish to delete
e
e
ee.
.
.
..
Perform steps 2 and 3 in "Adding
scenes to a Playlist (Edit)" (p.98).
3
3
3
33
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
e
e
e
ee
to mo
to mo
to mo
to mo to move the
ve the
ve the
ve theve the cursor
cursor
cursor
cursor cursor to the
to the
to the
to the to the
lowe
lowe
lowe
lowelower row
r row
r row
r rowr row, then c
, then c
, then c
, then c, then choo
hoo
hoo
hoohoose a sce
se a sce
se a sce
se a scese a scene yo
ne yo
ne yo
ne yone you
u
u
u u
wish to delete
wish to delete
wish to delete
wish to deletewish to delete by pressing
by pressing
by pressing
by pressing by pressing
d
d
d
dd
/
/
/
/ /
c
c
c
cc
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
4
4
4
44
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press thePress the confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati confirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button.on button.
• You can also use the DELETE
button of the remote control
instead of the confirmation
button.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 to delete
other scenes.
5
5
5
55
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen whether
to end appears.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Disp
Disp
Disp
DispDisplay the “
lay the “
lay the “
lay the “lay the “Edit Play
Edit Play
Edit Play
Edit PlayEdit PlayList” sc
List” sc
List” sc
List” scList” screen o
reen o
reen o
reen oreen of
f
f
f f
the Pla
the Pla
the Pla
the Plathe Playlist yo
ylist yo
ylist yo
ylist yoylist you wish to edit.
u wish to edit.
u wish to edit.
u wish to edit.u wish to edit.
Perform steps 2 and 3 in "Adding
scenes to a Playlist (Edit)" (p.98).
3
3
3
33
Move th
Move th
Move th
Move thMove the curs
e curs
e curs
e curse cursor to the
or to the
or to the
or to theor to the lower
lower
lower
lower lower row by
row by
row by
row by row by
pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing
e
e
e
ee
and
and
and
and and select th
select th
select th
select th select the insertio
e insertio
e insertio
e insertioe insertion
n
n
n n
position usi
position usi
position usi
position usiposition using
ng
ng
ng ng
d
d
d
dd
/
/
/
//
c
c
c
cc
.
.
.
..
4
4
4
44
Move the c
Move the c
Move the c
Move the cMove the cursor
ursor
ursor
ursor ursor to the upper
to the upper
to the upper
to the upperto the upper row by
row by
row by
row by row by
pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing
f
f
f
ff
and choose a
and choose a
and choose a
and choose a and choose a scene you
scene you
scene you
scene you scene you
wish to add, t
wish to add, t
wish to add, t
wish to add, twish to add, the press
he press
he press
he press he press
MENU.
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
5
5
5
55
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect “Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit” “Edit” “
“
“
“ “Add”, then press the
Add”, then press the
Add”, then press the
Add”, then press theAdd”, then press the
confirmat
confirmat
confirmat
confirmatconfirmation button.
ion button.
ion button.
ion button.ion button.
• Repeat steps 3 to 5 to add other
scenes.
6
6
6
66
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
7
7
7
77
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr”, then press t
ess t
ess t
ess tess the
he
he
he he
confirmat
confirmat
confirmat
confirmatconfirmation button.
ion button.
ion button.
ion button.ion button.
The disc navigation screen of the
edited Playlist appears.
Ed i t P l a yL i s t
P l a yL i s t No . 0 3
A l l P ro g ra
ms
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 7 / 0 0 7
ADD
PHOTO SELECT
Scene to be added
The green “I” mark shows
the insertion position.
Ed i t
a
ms
ENTER RETURN
0 0 7 / 0 0 7N o . 0 3
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
E x i t
A d d
Ed i t P l a y L i s t
P l a y L i s t N o . 03
A l l P ro g ra
ms
0 0 4 / 0 1 4
0 0 8 / 0 0 8
ADD
PHOTO SELECT

100
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Deleting scenes using
the Submenu for
Editing (Edit)
You can delete scenes from a Playlist
using the “Edit” menu screen.
Selecting scenes using
the Submenu for
Editing (Edit)
You can specify the range of scenes
when adding or deleting consecutive
multiple scenes to/from a playlist.
This “Select” menu item is useful
when selecting consecutive multiple
scenes in items for adding or deleting
scenes.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Display the
Display the
Display the
Display the Display the “Edit PlayLi
“Edit PlayLi
“Edit PlayLi
“Edit PlayLi“Edit PlayList” screen of
st” screen of
st” screen of
st” screen ofst” screen of
the Playl
the Playl
the Playl
the Playlthe Playlist y
ist y
ist y
ist yist you wish to edit
ou wish to edit
ou wish to edit
ou wish to editou wish to edit.
.
.
..
Perform steps 2 and 3 in "Adding
scenes to a Playlist (Edit)" (p.98).
3
3
3
33
Move
Move
Move
MoveMove the cu
the cu
the cu
the cu the cursor to the
rsor to the
rsor to the
rsor to thersor to the lowe
lowe
lowe
lowe lower row b
r row b
r row b
r row br row by
y
y
y y
pressing
pressing
pressing
pressing pressing
e
e
e
ee
and choose a scene
and choose a scene
and choose a scene
and choose a scene and choose a scene you
you
you
you you
wish to delete, the press
wish to delete, the press
wish to delete, the press
wish to delete, the press wish to delete, the press
MENU.
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
4
4
4
44
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “Edit”
t “Edit”
t “Edit”
t “Edit”t “Edit”
“D
“D
“D
“D “Delete”, th
elete”, th
elete”, th
elete”, thelete”, then pre
en pre
en pre
en preen press
ss
ss
ss ss
the co
the co
the co
the cothe confirma
nfirma
nfirma
nfirmanfirmation bu
tion bu
tion bu
tion bution button.
tton.
tton.
tton.tton.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 to delete
other scenes.
5
5
5
55
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
6
6
6
66
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”t “YES”, then pre
, then pre
, then pre
, then pre, then press the
ss the
ss the
ss the ss the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation but
mation but
mation but
mation butmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
The disc navigation screen of the
edited Playlist appears.
Hint
If you delete all scenes on a
Playlist, the Playlist itself will be
erased.
1
1
1
11
Pres
Pres
Pres
PresPress
s
s
s s , then pres
, then pres
, then pres
, then pres, then press
s
s
s s
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Display
Display
Display
DisplayDisplay the “E
the “E
the “E
the “E the “Edit PlayList” sc
dit PlayList” sc
dit PlayList” sc
dit PlayList” scdit PlayList” screen of
reen of
reen of
reen of reen of
the Pla
the Pla
the Pla
the Plathe Playlist y
ylist y
ylist y
ylist yylist you wish to edi
ou wish to edi
ou wish to edi
ou wish to ediou wish to edit.
t.
t.
t.t.
Perform steps 2 and 3 in "Adding
scenes to a Playlist (Edit)" (p.98).
3
3
3
33
Move
Move
Move
MoveMove the curs
the curs
the curs
the curs the cursor to the
or to the
or to the
or to theor to the first or last
first or last
first or last
first or last first or last
scene of t
scene of t
scene of t
scene of tscene of those you wish t
hose you wish t
hose you wish t
hose you wish those you wish to choose
o choose
o choose
o chooseo choose,
,
,
,,
then press
then press
then press
then press then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• To select all scenes, simply press
MENU.
4
4
4
44
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “Selec
t “Selec
t “Selec
t “Select “Select”
t”
t”
t” t” “
“
“
“ “Start
Start
Start
Start Start
→
Curre
Curre
Curre
Curre Current”/
nt”/
nt”/
nt”/nt”/
“Curre
“Curre
“Curre
“Curre“Current
nt
nt
nt nt
→
End”/”All”, t
End”/”All”, t
End”/”All”, t
End”/”All”, t End”/”All”, then pres
hen pres
hen pres
hen preshen press the
s the
s the
s the s the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
5
5
5
55
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
6
6
6
66
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “YES”,
ect “YES”,
ect “YES”,
ect “YES”,ect “YES”, the
the
the
the then press
n press
n press
n pressn press the
the
the
the the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
The disc navigation screen of the
edited Playlist appears.

101
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Arranging the order of
scenes in the Playlist
(Edit)
Renaming the title of
a Playlist (Title)
When a Playlist is created, its title is
automatically generated from the date,
time, and sequential number of
creation.
You can rename the title as many
times as you like.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Pl
ct “Pl
ct “Pl
ct “Plct “PlayLis
ayLis
ayLis
ayLisayList”
t”
t”
t” t” “Sel
“Sel
“Sel
“Sel “Select”
ect”
ect”
ect”ect”, then
, then
, then
, then , then
press the
press the
press the
press thepress the confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati confirmation butt
on butt
on butt
on button button.
on.
on.
on.on.
The “Select PlayList” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect the pl
ct the pl
ct the pl
ct the plct the playli
ayli
ayli
ayliaylist yo
st yo
st yo
st yost you w
u w
u w
u wu want t
ant t
ant t
ant tant to edit
o edit
o edit
o edito edit,
,
,
, ,
then
then
then
thenthen press th
press th
press th
press th press the con
e con
e con
e cone confirm
firm
firm
firmfirmation
ation
ation
ationation button
button
button
button button.
.
.
..
The targeted playlist screen
appears.
4
4
4
44
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect the s
ct the s
ct the s
ct the sct the scene you want to
cene you want to
cene you want to
cene you want to cene you want to move
move
move
movemove,
,
,
, ,
then press
then press
then press
then press then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
You can also select multiple
scenes (p.49).
5
5
5
55
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Scene”
ct “Scene”
ct “Scene”
ct “Scene” ct “Scene” “Edit
“Edit
“Edit
“Edit “Edit”
”
”
” ” “Move”,
“Move”,
“Move”,
“Move”, “Move”,
then
then
then
thenthen press th
press th
press th
press th press the con
e con
e con
e cone confirm
firm
firm
firmfirmation
ation
ation
ationation button
button
button
button button.
.
.
..
The “Move Scene” screen appears.
6
6
6
66
If
If
If
If If you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need tyou do not need to change the
o change the
o change the
o change the o change the
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confiscene(s), press the confirmation
rmation
rmation
rmation rmation
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
7
7
7
77
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect the pos
ct the pos
ct the pos
ct the posct the positi
iti
iti
itiition where y
on where y
on where y
on where yon where you wish t
ou wish t
ou wish t
ou wish tou wish to
o
o
o o
move the
move the
move the
move the move the scene, then pre
scene, then pre
scene, then pre
scene, then prescene, then press th
ss th
ss th
ss thss the
e
e
e e
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button.
on.
on.
on.on.
The confirmation screen appears.
8
8
8
88
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, t
”, t
”, t
”, t”, then pre
hen pre
hen pre
hen prehen press the
ss the
ss the
ss the ss the
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button.
on.
on.
on.on.
The scenes of the playlist are
rearranged and the screen returns
to the playlist screen.
• To quit the move, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button.
Notes
• When using the HDD, you need to
set “Category” to “All” before
using this function (p.86).
• When using a DVD-RAM, you
need to set “Category” to “All”
before using this function (p.114).
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelec
ec
ec
ecect “P
t “P
t “P
t “Pt “Pla
la
la
lalayL
yL
yL
yLyList”
ist”
ist”
ist”ist”
“T
“T
“T
“T “Title
itle
itle
itleitle”, the
”, the
”, the
”, the”, then
n
n
n n pres
pres
pres
prespress
s
s
s s
the confi
the confi
the confi
the confithe confirmation
rmation
rmation
rmation rmation button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The “PlayList Title” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect the pla
t the pla
t the pla
t the plat the playlist w
ylist w
ylist w
ylist wylist whose
hose
hose
hosehose title you w
title you w
title you w
title you w title you wish
ish
ish
ish ish
to ch
to ch
to ch
to chto chang
ang
ang
angange
e
e
ee, then pre
, then pre
, then pre
, then pre, then press the
ss the
ss the
ss thess the con
con
con
con confirma
firma
firma
firmafirmation
tion
tion
tion tion
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
4
4
4
44
Ren
Ren
Ren
RenRenam
am
am
amame the title
e the title
e the title
e the titlee the title.
.
.
..
• The method to rename the
Playlist title is the same as the
procedure explained in
"Renaming the title of a program
(Title)" (p.93).
The disc navigation screen of the
Playlist whose title has been
changed appears.

102
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Deleting a Playlist
(Delete)
Even if you delete a playlist, the
original scenes stored on the HDD/
DVD will not be deleted. You can delete unnecessary scenes.
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “PlayLi
t “PlayLi
t “PlayLi
t “PlayLit “PlayList”
st”
st”
st” st” “De
“De
“De
“De “Delete”
lete”
lete”
lete”lete”, then
, then
, then
, then , then
press t
press t
press t
press tpress the confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation buthe confirmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
The “Delete PlayList” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the playl
the playl
the playl
the playl the playlist you wan to delet
ist you wan to delet
ist you wan to delet
ist you wan to deletist you wan to delete
e
e
ee,
,
,
, ,
then pre
then pre
then pre
then prethen press the confi
ss the confi
ss the confi
ss the confiss the confirmation but
rmation but
rmation but
rmation butrmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton.ton.
The targeted playlist screen
appears.
4
4
4
44
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”t “YES”, then pre
, then pre
, then pre
, then pre, then press the
ss the
ss the
ss the ss the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
After deletion, the disc navigation
screen will be restored.
• To quit deletion, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button.
Hint
If any playlist is deleted, the
number of playlists will
automatically be revised. (For
example, if the No.2 playlist is
deleted, the No.3 playlist will
become the No.2 playlist, etc.)
Deleti
Deleti
Deleti
DeletiDeleting Scen
ng Scen
ng Scen
ng Scenng Scenes
es
es
eses
(Edit – Delete)
(Edit – Delete)
(Edit – Delete)
(Edit – Delete)(Edit – Delete)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the scene
the scene
the scene
the scene the scene you want to delet
you want to delet
you want to delet
you want to delet you want to delete
e
e
ee,
,
,
, ,
then press
then press
then press
then press then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
3
3
3
33
y
F
F
F
FFor HDD/DVD
or HDD/DVD
or HDD/DVD
or HDD/DVDor HDD/DVD
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “Scene”
t “Scene”
t “Scene”
t “Scene” t “Scene” “Edi
“Edi
“Edi
“Edi “Edit”
t”
t”
t” t”
“D
“D
“D
“D“Delete”
elete”
elete”
elete”elete”, then pr
, then pr
, then pr
, then pr, then press the
ess the
ess the
ess theess the
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmaticonfirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button.on button.
y
F
F
F
FFor a c
or a c
or a c
or a cor a card
ard
ard
ardard
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “Scene”
t “Scene”
t “Scene”
t “Scene” t “Scene” “Dele
“Dele
“Dele
“Dele “Delete”, then
te”, then
te”, then
te”, then te”, then
press the c
press the c
press the c
press the cpress the confirmatio
onfirmatio
onfirmatio
onfirmatioonfirmation button.
n button.
n button.
n button.n button.
4
4
4
44
If
If
If
IfIf you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t you do not need to change the
o change the
o change the
o change the o change the
scene(s), pr
scene(s), pr
scene(s), pr
scene(s), prscene(s), press the confir
ess the confir
ess the confir
ess the confiress the confirmation
mation
mation
mation mation
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
5
5
5
55
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “YES”,
ect “YES”,
ect “YES”,
ect “YES”,ect “YES”, then pr
then pr
then pr
then pr then press the
ess the
ess the
ess the ess the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
The selected scene will be deleted.
• Repeat steps 4 and 5 to delete
other scenes.
6
6
6
66
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
to end the pr
to end the pr
to end the pr
to end the pr to end the procedure.
ocedure.
ocedure.
ocedure.ocedure.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR)
R)
R)
R)R) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

103
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
z Editing using the Submenu
Other than the Menu from the disc
navigation screen (p.88), there is a
Submenu. When you press MENU
while in some step, Submenu appears
whenever it is available.
• The Submenu appears only in steps
where any of the Submenu items are
usable and only usable items are
displayed.
• To return to the original step, press
C.
The table below is the example of the
Submenu when MENU is pressed in
step 3 in "Deleting Scenes (Edit –
Delete)" (p.102).
You can divide a scene into two parts.
To delete an unnecessary portion of a
scene, first divide the scene at the
point where you want to end or start
saving, and then delete the
unnecessary portion.
Notes
• The remaining space indicator
may not show any increase if the
deleted amount is small (e.g.
deleting a short movie, small
number of stills, etc.).
• The locked scenes on a card cannot
be deleted (p.110).
• If you delete all data on the HDD/
DVD/card, formatting the HDD/
DVD/card is recommended
(p.112).
Hints
• You can also delete a scene by
pressing
DELETE
on the remote
control after placing the cursor on
the scene you want to delete on the
disc navigation screen.
• To delete an unwanted part of a
scene on HDD/DVD-RAM/
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc,
divide the scene first, then delete
the unnecessary part (p.103).
Submenu
items Explanation
Edit
Delete Deletes the selected scene.
Exit Returns to the disc
navigation screen.
Select
Start
→
Current
Selects all the scenes from
the top to the scene at the
cursor position.
Current
→
End
Selects all the scenes from
the scene at the cursor
position to the end.
All Selects all scenes.
Go To
Top Moves the cursor to the top
scene.
End Moves the cursor to the
scene at the end.
Dividing a Mo
Dividing a Mo
Dividing a Mo
Dividing a MoDividing a Movie
vie
vie
vievie
(Edit – Di
(Edit – Di
(Edit – Di
(Edit – Di(Edit – Divide)
vide)
vide)
vide)vide)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect the s
ct the s
ct the s
ct the sct the scene
cene
cene
cene cene you want to divi
you want to divi
you want to divi
you want to diviyou want to divide
de
de
dede,
,
,
, ,
then pres
then pres
then pres
then presthen press
s
s
s s
MENU
.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scenect “Scene”
”
”
” ” “Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit”
“Edit” “Edit”
“Di
“Di
“Di
“Di“Divide”
vide”
vide”
vide”vide”, then pre
, then pre
, then pre
, then pre, then press th
ss th
ss th
ss thss the conf
e conf
e conf
e confe confirma
irma
irma
irmairmation
tion
tion
tion tion
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The “Divide Scene” screen appears.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (
(
(
( (VR
VR
VR
VRVR)
)
)
))

104
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
4
4
4
44
If
If
If
IfIf you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t you do not need to change t
o change t
o change t
o change to change the
he
he
he he
dividi
dividi
dividi
divididividing scene, press the
ng scene, press the
ng scene, press the
ng scene, press the ng scene, press the confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation
mation
mation
mation mation
button agai
button agai
button agai
button agaibutton again.
n.
n.
n.n.
The selected scene will be played
back.
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
5
5
5
55
When you reach t
When you reach t
When you reach t
When you reach tWhen you reach the desire
he desire
he desire
he desirehe desired point of
d point of
d point of
d point ofd point of
divisi
divisi
divisi
divisidivision, pres
on, pres
on, pres
on, preson, press
s
s
s s
PHOTO/SELECT
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
6
6
6
66
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”t “YES”, then p
, then p
, then p
, then p, then press the
ress the
ress the
ress the ress the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation but
mation but
mation but
mation butmation button.
ton.
ton.
ton. ton.
The selected scene will be divided,
then the display will return to the
“Divide Scene” screen.
• To quit division, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button. The playback pause
screen will appear. Press
C
C
C
CC
to
quit.
Hints
• Search and frame advance (p.54)
are useful when designating
division points.
• If a fade has been added to the
original scene, the “IN” effect
will be added to the first half of
the scene, and the “OUT” effect,
to the latter half (p.106).
• Combining scenes that were
divided will restore the original
scene.
Notes
• Scenes with the skip setting cannot
be played, therefore, you cannot
specify the dividing point.
Remove the skip setting first to
divide.
• The actual point of division may
shift 0.5 seconds forward/
backward from the point you have
specified.
• If the division point is at the start
or end of a scene, a message
indicating this appears and
division cannot be made.
• A movie scene of 0.5 seconds or
less cannot be divided.
• If free space available on the
HDD/DVD is insufficient,
division will not be possible.
Delete unnecessary scenes.
• If you divide a scene with the dub
mark “ ”, the dub marks will
appear on both divided scenes.

105
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
If you have recorded numerous short
scenes, combining them can be
convenient.
Be sure to select consecutive multiple
scenes. When using the HDD or a
DVD-RAM, combining scenes is
possible only if “Category: All” is
specified (p.86, 114).
Stills cannot be combined.
Combinin
Combinin
Combinin
CombininCombining Multiple
g Multiple
g Multiple
g Multiple g Multiple
Scenes
Scenes
Scenes
ScenesScenes
(Edit – C
(Edit – C
(Edit – C
(Edit – C(Edit – Combine)
ombine)
ombine)
ombine)ombine)
1
1
1
11
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “S
ect “S
ect “S
ect “Sect “Scene”
cene”
cene”
cene” cene” “Edit
“Edit
“Edit
“Edit “Edit”
”
”
” ”
“Co
“Co
“Co
“Co“Combi
mbi
mbi
mbimbine”, the
ne”, the
ne”, the
ne”, thene”, then press
n press
n press
n pressn press the confirm
the confirm
the confirm
the confirm the confirmation
ation
ation
ation ation
butt
butt
butt
buttbutton.
on.
on.
on.on.
The “Combine Scenes” screen
appears.
3
3
3
33
Mo
Mo
Mo
MoMove the
ve the
ve the
ve theve the curso
curso
curso
curso cursor to th
r to th
r to th
r to thr to the first s
e first s
e first s
e first se first scene
cene
cene
cenecene you
you
you
you you
wish to combine
wish to combine
wish to combine
wish to combinewish to combine, then press the
, then press the
, then press the
, then press the , then press the
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation button.
rmation button.
rmation button.
rmation button.rmation button.
The cursor turns to 2-color (blue
and yellow) frame.
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
4
4
4
44
Move
Move
Move
MoveMove the
the
the
the the cursor to
cursor to
cursor to
cursor to cursor to the las
the las
the las
the las the last scen
t scen
t scen
t scent scene to be
e to be
e to be
e to bee to be
combined,
combined,
combined,
combined,combined, then press
then press
then press
then press then press the conf
the conf
the conf
the conf the confirmati
irmati
irmati
irmatiirmation
on
on
on on
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The red cursor surrounds all the
scenes to be combined.
The cursor at the last scene turns to
2-color (red and yellow) frame.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (
(
(
( (VR
VR
VR
VRVR)
)
)
))
5
5
5
55
Press the
Press the
Press the
Press thePress the confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati confirmation button if
on button if
on button if
on button ifon button if no
no
no
no no
change is
change is
change is
change ischange is needed.
needed.
needed.
needed. needed.
The confirmation screen that
shows the top and last scenes
appears.
• If you need to change the
combining range, press C. The
color of the cursor returns to
yellow and you can reselect the
scene.
6
6
6
66
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr”, then press t
ess t
ess t
ess tess the
he
he
he he
confirmat
confirmat
confirmat
confirmatconfirmation button.
ion button.
ion button.
ion button.ion button.
The scenes in the specified range will
be combined, then the screen will
return to the beginning of step 3. (On
the thumbnail, the first scene of the
combined range of the scenes will
appear.)
• You can combine other scenes
by repeating the procedure from
steps 3 to 6.
• To quit combining scenes, select
“NO” before pressing the
confirmation button. The screen
after pressing the confirmation
button in step 3 will be restored.
Press C to deselect the range
cursor, then the screen returns to
the beginning of step 3.
7
7
7
77 Press C to end the procedure.

106
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
You can add fading to the beginning
and/or end of a scene.
There are three types of special
effects:
Notes
• Scenes in different programs
(different recording dates) cannot
be combined. Create a Playlist first
(p.96), then combine such scenes
on the Playlist.
• When using the HDD, you cannot
combine scenes of different movie
qualities (“VIDEO mode” settings) /
wide mode (“16:9”) settings.
• If you combine scenes, both with
dub marks “ ”, the dub mark
will appear on the combined scene.
• If you combine scenes, both with
and without dub marks, the dub
mark will not appear on the
combined scene.
Adding Specia
Adding Specia
Adding Specia
Adding SpeciaAdding Special Effects
l Effects
l Effects
l Effects l Effects
(Edit –
(Edit –
(Edit –
(Edit –(Edit –Fad
Fad
Fad
FadFade)
e)
e)
e)e)
Hints
• With fade effects, the “IN”
effect of the first scene in the
selected range and the “OUT”
effect of the last scene will be
attached to the combined scene.
• Each time you press DISPLAY,
the operation guide, the
recording date/time of the
selected scene, movie quality
(VIDEO Mode), screen aspect
ratio, and the recording length
(when using HDD) will appear.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR
R
R
RR)
)
)
))
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Select
Select
Select
SelectSelect the scene
the scene
the scene
the scene the scene you w
you w
you w
you w you want t
ant t
ant t
ant tant to apply a
o apply a
o apply a
o apply a o apply a
special effe
special effe
special effe
special effespecial effect to
ct to
ct to
ct toct to, then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
White
Fade Out
Fade In
· Fades in from a white screen.
· Fades out to a white screen.
Wipe
Fade out
Fade in
· In: From a black screen, the image opens from
a horizontal split at the center.
· Out: The image closes with two black wipes
meeting at the horizontal center.
B/W
Fade out
Fade in
· Fades in from a black and white screen to a full
color screen.
· Fades out from a full color screen to a black
and white screen.

107
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
You can set the skip setting for scenes
you do not want played back so the
scenes with the setting will be
skipped.
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scenect “Scene”
”
”
” ” “Eff
“Eff
“Eff
“Eff “Effect”
ect”
ect”
ect”ect”
“Fade”, then pres
“Fade”, then pres
“Fade”, then pres
“Fade”, then pres“Fade”, then press t
s t
s t
s ts the confi
he confi
he confi
he confihe confirmat
rmat
rmat
rmatrmation
ion
ion
ion ion
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The “Fade” screen appears.
4
4
4
44
If
If
If
If If you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need t
you do not need tyou do not need to change the
o change the
o change the
o change the o change the
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confi
scene(s), press the confiscene(s), press the confirmation
rmation
rmation
rmation rmation
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
5
5
5
55
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect th
ct th
ct th
ct thct the speci
e speci
e speci
e specie special ef
al ef
al ef
al efal effe
fe
fe
fefects f
cts f
cts f
cts fcts for “I
or “I
or “I
or “Ior “IN” or
N” or
N” or
N” or N” or
“OUT”,
“OUT”,
“OUT”,
“OUT”, “OUT”, “
“
“
“ “Enter”,
Enter”,
Enter”,
Enter”,Enter”, then
then
then
then then press t
press t
press t
press t press the
he
he
he he
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button.
on.
on.
on.on.
The “Fade” screen will be restored
after a message is displayed.
• Use f
f
f
ff e
e
e
ee / to move the
cursor to “IN”, “OUT”, “Enter”,
or “Cancel”.
• Use d
d
d
dd c
c
c
cc / to select the effect
to be added, then press the
confirmation button to set the
effect.
• To cancel setting, select
“Cancel”.
• Repeat steps 2–5 to add effects
to other scenes.
6
6
6
66
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
to end t
to end t
to end t
to end t to end the procedur
he procedur
he procedur
he procedurhe procedure
e
e
ee.
.
.
..
The “ ” or “ ” icon will
appear in the scenes for which fade
in or fade out has been set.
PLAY
“OUT” effect
“IN” effect
Skippin
Skippin
Skippin
SkippinSkipping Scen
g Scen
g Scen
g Sceng Scenes
es
es
es es
(Effec
(Effec
(Effec
(Effec(Effect – Skip)
t – Skip)
t – Skip)
t – Skip)t – Skip)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Move th
Move th
Move th
Move thMove the curs
e curs
e curs
e curse cursor to
or to
or to
or to or to the sce
the sce
the sce
the scethe scene to be
ne to be
ne to be
ne to bene to be
skipped, the
skipped, the
skipped, the
skipped, theskipped, then press
n press
n press
n press n press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Sc
ct “Sc
ct “Sc
ct “Scct “Scene”
ene”
ene”
ene” ene” “Eff
“Eff
“Eff
“Eff “Effect”
ect”
ect”
ect”ect”
“Skip”
“Skip”
“Skip”
“Skip”“Skip”, then pr
, then pr
, then pr
, then pr, then press the
ess the
ess the
ess theess the confi
confi
confi
confi confirmat
rmat
rmat
rmatrmation
ion
ion
ion ion
button.
button.
button.
button.button.
The “Set Skip” screen appears.
Notes
• If a DVD disc with a special
effect created on this camcorder
is played on another DVD
recorder/player, or the scene is
captured on a PC, the special
effect will not be reflected.
• When dubbing on a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW disc,
the special effect will not be
reflected (p.81).
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR)
R)
R)
R)R)

108
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
z To remove the skip setting
Repeat the same procedure. The skip
setting will be removed and the
icon will disappear.
Normally, the first image of the
recorded scene is displayed as a
thumbnail. However, you can choose
another image of the scene for the
thumbnail. If you set a memorable
image for the thumbnail, you can
know what you recorded from a
glance at the Disc Navigation screen.
4
4
4
44
Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation buthe confirmation button if no
ton if no
ton if no
ton if noton if no
change is neede
change is neede
change is neede
change is needechange is needed.
d.
d.
d.d.
After the skip setting, the “Set
Skip” screen will be restored.
• You can change the scene(s) to
be skipped before pressing the
confirmation button.
• Repeat this step to set the skip
setting for other scenes.
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
5
5
5
55
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
to end the
to end the
to end the
to end the to end the procedure.
procedure.
procedure.
procedure.procedure.
The “ ” icon indicates the skip
setting and appears on the scenes
to be skipped.
A l l P r
o
Skip icon
Notes
• If a DVD containing scenes with
the skip setting set on this
camcorder is played on another
DVD recorder/player, or such
scenes are captured on a PC, the
skip setting will not be reflected
("Note" (p.89)).
• When dubbing on a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW disc,
the skip setting will not be
reflected (p.81).
Chan
Chan
Chan
ChanChanging Th
ging Th
ging Th
ging Thging Thumbnai
umbnai
umbnai
umbnaiumbnail
l
l
l l
Image
Image
Image
Image Image
(Effec
(Effec
(Effec
(Effec(Effect – Thum
t – Thum
t – Thum
t – Thumt – Thumbnai
bnai
bnai
bnaibnail)
l)
l)
l)l)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Move
Move
Move
MoveMove the cu
the cu
the cu
the cu the cursor to th
rsor to th
rsor to th
rsor to thrsor to the sce
e sce
e sce
e scee scene of th
ne of th
ne of th
ne of thne of the
e
e
e e
thumbnail you wi
thumbnail you wi
thumbnail you wi
thumbnail you withumbnail you wish to change, then
sh to change, then
sh to change, then
sh to change, then sh to change, then
press
press
press
press press
MENU
.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “Sce
ect “Sce
ect “Sce
ect “Sceect “Scene”
ne”
ne”
ne” ne” “Eff
“Eff
“Eff
“Eff “Effect”
ect”
ect”
ect” ect”
“T
“T
“T
“T“Thumbnail”, t
humbnail”, t
humbnail”, t
humbnail”, thumbnail”, then press t
hen press t
hen press t
hen press then press the
he
he
he he
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
The “Change Thumbnail” screen
appears.
4
4
4
44
Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the confi
he confi
he confi
he confihe confirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button if no
on if no
on if no
on if no on if no
change is neede
change is neede
change is neede
change is needechange is needed.
d.
d.
d.d.
Playback of the selected scene
begins.
• You can reselect the scene
before pressing the confirmation
button.
• If you press MENU before
pressing PHOTO/SELECT, the
Submenu appears (p.103).
5
5
5
55
When the image y
When the image y
When the image y
When the image yWhen the image you wish to us
ou wish to us
ou wish to us
ou wish to usou wish to use as the
e as the
e as the
e as the e as the
thumbnail of t
thumbnail of t
thumbnail of t
thumbnail of tthumbnail of the scene appea
he scene appea
he scene appea
he scene appeahe scene appears
rs
rs
rsrs, press
, press
, press
, press, press
PHOTO/SELECT
.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR
R
R
RR)
)
)
))

109
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
You can move the cursor to the scene
recorded first or last using this
function.
Insert a DVD-RAM (recorded on an
Hitachi DVD camcorder that can
record still pictures on a DVD-RAM)
that includes the photos you wish to
copy, and a card with recordable
space, into this camcorder.
• Movies cannot be copied.
• Even if all scenes, including movies,
are selected to be copied, only stills
will be copied.
6
6
6
66
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, then
”, then
”, then
”, then ”, then press t
press t
press t
press tpress the
he
he
he he
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation button.
rmation button.
rmation button.
rmation button.rmation button.
The screen returns to the
beginning of step 4.
• To change the thumbnail of
another scene, repeat steps 4 to
6.
• To cancel the change, select
“NO” before pressing the
confirmation button.
7
7
7
77 Press C to end the procedure.
Hint
Search and frame advance (p.54)
are useful while you are choosing
a thumbnail image.
Notes
• A thumbnail of a still cannot be
changed.
• Since the scene to which skipping
is set cannot be played back, you
cannot change its thumbnail.
Remove the skip setting of the
scene first to change the
thumbnail.
• If a disc with a thumbnail change
created on this camcorder is
played on another DVD recorder/
player, or the scene is captured on
a PC, the thumbnail change will
not be reflected ("Note" (p.89)).
• When dubbing on a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW disc,
the thumbnail change will not be
reflected (p.81).
Go To
Go To
Go To
Go ToGo To
1
1
1
11
Press ,
Press ,
Press ,
Press , Press , then
then
then
then then
MENU
.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Go To”
ct “Go To”
ct “Go To”
ct “Go To” ct “Go To” “T
“T
“T
“T “Top” or “End”,
op” or “End”,
op” or “End”,
op” or “End”,op” or “End”,
then
then
then
thenthen press th
press th
press th
press th press the co
e co
e co
e coe confirm
nfirm
nfirm
nfirmnfirmation
ation
ation
ationation butto
butto
butto
butto button.
n.
n.
n.n.
The cursor jumps to the top or last
scene in the disc navigation
screen.
Copying s
Copying s
Copying s
Copying sCopying still pi
till pi
till pi
till pitill pictures
ctures
ctures
ctures ctures
on a DVD-RAM to
on a DVD-RAM to
on a DVD-RAM to
on a DVD-RAM toon a DVD-RAM to the
the
the
the the
Card (Copy)
Card (Copy)
Card (Copy)
Card (Copy)Card (Copy)
1
1
1
11
T
T
T
TTurn th
urn th
urn th
urn thurn the po
e po
e po
e poe power s
wer s
wer s
wer swer swit
wit
wit
witwitch to “
ch to “
ch to “
ch to “ch to “DVD
DVD
DVD
DVDDVD”
”
”
””.
.
.
..
2
2
2
22
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
3
3
3
33
Move th
Move th
Move th
Move thMove the curs
e curs
e curs
e curse cursor to the
or to the
or to the
or to theor to the scene t
scene t
scene t
scene t scene to be
o be
o be
o be o be
copied, the
copied, the
copied, the
copied, thecopied, then press
n press
n press
n press n press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

110
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
You can lock selected stills recorded
on a card so that they will not be
deleted or edited by mistake.
4
4
4
44
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “Scene
ect “Scene
ect “Scene
ect “Sceneect “Scene”
”
”
” ” “Copy”, the
“Copy”, the
“Copy”, the
“Copy”, the “Copy”, then press
n press
n press
n press n press
the co
the co
the co
the cothe confirma
nfirma
nfirma
nfirmanfirmation b
tion b
tion b
tion btion button
utton
utton
uttonutton.
.
.
..
The “Copy to card” screen
appears.
5
5
5
55
Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation but
he confirmation buthe confirmation button i
ton i
ton i
ton iton if no
f no
f no
f no f no
change is neede
change is neede
change is neede
change is needechange is needed.
d.
d.
d.d.
• You can change the scene(s) to
be copied in this step if you
wish.
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
6
6
6
66
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”
t “YES”t “YES”, then p
, then p
, then p
, then p, then press th
ress th
ress th
ress thress the
e
e
e e
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
The screen returns to step 5 where
you can select other scenes.
• To copy other scenes, repeat
steps 5 and 6.
• To cancel copying, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button.
7
7
7
77 Press C to end the procedure.
Hint
To check the still pictures on the
DVD-RAM, see "Displaying
Information Using the Menu
Screen (Detail)" (p.111).
Locki
Locki
Locki
LockiLocking Scen
ng Scen
ng Scen
ng Scenng Scenes on a
es on a
es on a
es on a es on a
Card (
Card (
Card (
Card (Card (Lock)
Lock)
Lock)
Lock)Lock)
1
1
1
11
T
T
T
TTurn the
urn the
urn the
urn theurn the pow
pow
pow
pow power sw
er sw
er sw
er swer switch to “
itch to “
itch to “
itch to “itch to “SD”. (p
SD”. (p
SD”. (p
SD”. (pSD”. (p.45)
.45)
.45)
.45).45)
2
2
2
22
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect
ct
ct
ctct the
the
the
the the still
still
still
still still you w
you w
you w
you w you want
ant
ant
antant to lo
to lo
to lo
to lo to lock, t
ck, t
ck, t
ck, tck, the
he
he
hehen
n
n
n n
press
press
press
press press
MENU
.
.
.
..
• You can also choose multiple
scenes (p.49).
4
4
4
44
Sel
Sel
Sel
SelSelect “Scene
ect “Scene
ect “Scene
ect “Sceneect “Scene”
”
”
” ” “Lock”,
“Lock”,
“Lock”,
“Lock”, “Lock”, then pr
then pr
then pr
then pr then press
ess
ess
ess ess
the c
the c
the c
the cthe confirm
onfirm
onfirm
onfirmonfirmation
ation
ation
ationation bu
bu
bu
bu button.
tton.
tton.
tton.tton.
The “Lock Set” screen appears.
5
5
5
55
Press t
Press t
Press t
Press tPress the confi
he confi
he confi
he confihe confirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button if no
on if no
on if no
on if no on if no
change is neede
change is neede
change is neede
change is needechange is needed.
d.
d.
d.d.
• You can change the scene to be
locked in this step if you wish.
• If you press MENU before
pressing the confirmation
button, the Submenu appears
(p.103).
Notes
• You cannot copy from a card to a
DVD.
• The copied pictures on the card
will retain the qualities of the
original pictures on the DVD-
RAM.
CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD

111
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
z To unlock the scene
Select the scene you wish to unlock,
then perform steps 4 and 5 in
"Locking Scenes on a Card (Lock)".
The lock icon “ ” will disappear and
locking will be released.
You can display various information
for a scene: recording date/time and
length, special effects and movie
quality mode.
6
6
6
66
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
to end t
to end t
to end t
to end t to end the procedur
he procedur
he procedur
he procedurhe procedure
e
e
ee.
.
.
..
The icon “ ” appears on the locked
still picture on the disc navigation
screen.
Displaying
Displaying
Displaying
DisplayingDisplaying Informatio
Informatio
Informatio
Informatio Information
n
n
n n
Using th
Using th
Using th
Using thUsing the Menu S
e Menu S
e Menu S
e Menu Se Menu Screen
creen
creen
creencreen
(Det
(Det
(Det
(Det(Detail)
ail)
ail)
ail)ail)
1
1
1
11
Press .
Press .
Press .
Press .Press .
2
2
2
22
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect the sc
ct the sc
ct the sc
ct the scct the scene you want to
ene you want to
ene you want to
ene you want to ene you want to know
know
know
know know
about, th
about, th
about, th
about, thabout, then p
en p
en p
en pen press
ress
ress
ress ress
MENU
.
.
.
..
7 / 1 9
Lock icon
Note
If you format the card, the locked
scenes will also be deleted.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scene
ct “Scenect “Scene”
”
”
” ” “Detail
“Detail
“Detail
“Detail “Detail”, t
”, t
”, t
”, t”, then
hen
hen
hen hen
press the
press the
press the
press thepress the confirmati
confirmati
confirmati
confirmati confirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button.on button.
The detailed information of the
scene appears.
*1 Not displayed with DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW discs.
*2 “Dubbed” appears only when
you selected a scene from the
HDD, with a dub mark on
its thumbnail.
*3 Not displayed with DVD-RAM/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (finalized)/
+RW discs recorded on another
device.
*4 Will not appear if the loaded
card does not comply with DCF
(Design rule for Camera File
system).
*5 The number of horizontal pixels
on a still picture
• Pressing c d/ will display
information of other scenes.
4
4
4
44
Press
Press
Press
Press Press
C
C
C
CC
to qu
to qu
to qu
to qu to quit.
it.
it.
it.it.
The disc navigation screen will be
restored.
De t a i l
Sc e n e N o. 0 0 7
V IDEO (F I NE ) 1m i n 1 3 s e c
Da t e : 1 2 / 1 / 20 0 8 8 : 00 : 0 0 A M
S k i p :
O
f f
F a d e I N : No n e OUT : N on e
D u b b e d
PREV NEXT RETURN
De t a i l
Sc e n e N o. 7
100–0007(640)
L o c k :
O
f f
PREV NEXT RETURN
Da t e : 1 2/ 1 / 200 8 8 : 00 : 0 0A M
When using a card
When using HDD/DVD
*1
*2 *3
*4
*5

112
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Formatting the HDD, or a DVD or
card deletes all recorded contents.
If you wish to delete all recorded
contents, it is recommended that you
use format, which will delete all the
scenes much quicker than using the
scene delete function.
Hints
• DCF (Design rule for Camera
File system) is a unified image
file format for video cameras.
Image files can be commonly
used for all digital devices that
conform to DCF. This
camcorder complies with DCF.
• When only a certain scene is
displayed, you can display the
information of the next scene by
pressing c or previous scene
by pressing d.
• If multiple scenes have been
selected, the total recording time
of the selected scenes (total
number in case of stills) will
appear.
*1 Displayed when the VIDEO Mode
(movie quality) is unknown
because, for example, the scene
was recorded on another device.
*2 Displayed when a DVD-RAM with
photos recorded using an Hitachi
DVD camcorder that can record
still pictures on a DVD-RAM is set
in this camcorder.
*3 Not displayed with a DVD-RAM/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (finalized)/
+RW that was recorded on another
device.
De t a i l
V I DEO : 1
m
i n 4 3 s e c ( 2 s c e n e s )
( X T R A ) : 0
m
i n 0 s e c ( 0 s c e n e s )
( F I N E ) : 1
m
i n 4 3 s e c ( 2 s c e n e s )
( S T D ) : 0
m
i n 0 s e c ( 0 s c e n e s )
PHOTO : 0
( - - - ) : 1
m
i n 0 s e c ( 0 s c e n e s )
RETURN
De t a i l
S c e ne No . 6
S c e n e s : 2
1 2/ 1 5 / 20 0 8 1 2 : 5 0:00PM
S c e ne No . 7
1 2/ 1 6 / 200 8 8 : 0 0:00AM
RETURN
When using a card
When using the HDD/DVD
*3
*1
*2
Formatt
Formatt
Formatt
FormattFormatting the
ing the
ing the
ing theing the HDD/
HDD/
HDD/
HDD/ HDD/
DVD/CARD
DVD/CARD
DVD/CARD
DVD/CARDDVD/CARD
1
1
1
11
Insert
Insert
Insert
InsertInsert the medium you want to format
the medium you want to format
the medium you want to format
the medium you want to format the medium you want to format
(except
(except
(except
(except(except for the
for the
for the
for the for the HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD HDD).
).
).
).).
2
2
2
22
Pres
Pres
Pres
PresPress
s
s
s s , then pr
, then pr
, then pr
, then pr, then press
ess
ess
ess ess
MENU
.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33
Selec
Selec
Selec
SelecSelect “HD
t “HD
t “HD
t “HDt “HDD Se
D Se
D Se
D SeD Setting”
tting”
tting”
tting”tting” or “D
or “D
or “D
or “D or “DVD
VD
VD
VDVD
Sett
Sett
Sett
SettSetting” or “Card Setti
ing” or “Card Setti
ing” or “Card Setti
ing” or “Card Settiing” or “Card Setting”
ng”
ng”
ng” ng” F
F
F
F For
or
or
or or
“HDD Setting”,
“HDD Setting”,
“HDD Setting”,
“HDD Setting”,“HDD Setting”, selec
selec
selec
selec select “Forma
t “Forma
t “Forma
t “Format “Format HDD”
t HDD”
t HDD”
t HDD” t HDD”
then pre
then pre
then pre
then prethen press the confi
ss the confi
ss the confi
ss the confiss the confirmati
rmati
rmati
rmatirmation button.
on button.
on button.
on button. on button.
Lik
Lik
Lik
LikLikew
ew
ew
ewewise
ise
ise
iseise, for “
, for “
, for “
, for “, for “DVD
DVD
DVD
DVDDVD Setti
Setti
Setti
Setti Setting”, se
ng”, se
ng”, se
ng”, seng”, select
lect
lect
lect lect
“F
“F
“F
“F“Form
orm
orm
ormorma
a
a
aat DVD
t DVD
t DVD
t DVDt DVD”, or fo
”, or fo
”, or fo
”, or fo”, or for “Ca
r “Ca
r “Ca
r “Car “Card Setti
rd Setti
rd Setti
rd Settird Setting”
ng”
ng”
ng”ng”
select “
select “
select “
select “select “F
F
F
FFor
or
or
orormat C
mat C
mat C
mat Cmat Card”
ard”
ard”
ard”ard” then
then
then
then then pres
pres
pres
pres press the
s the
s the
s the s the
confir
confir
confir
confirconfirmation button.
mation button.
mation button.
mation button.mation button.
The confirmation screen appears.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) -RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Note
Formatting will delete all the
recorded contents on the HDD,
disc, or card. Be careful not to
delete data by mistake.

113
Editing
Editing
Editing
EditingEditing
Although previously recorded movies
will not be erased by recording new
movies, a protect setting will ensure
against accidental erasure and
formatting. If the protect setting is
activated, however, you will not be
able to make new recordings until the
protect setting is canceled.
4
4
4
44
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, th
”, th
”, th
”, th”, then pres
en pres
en pres
en presen press the
s the
s the
s the s the
confi
confi
confi
conficonfirmation butt
rmation butt
rmation butt
rmation buttrmation button.
on.
on.
on.on.
• When using the HDD/DVD-
RAM/+RW/Card, formatting
will start.
• When using a DVD-RW disc, a
screen for prompting you to
select the VF mode or VR mode
will appear (p.36).
* If you choose “VR mode” when
formatting a DVD-RW (VR
mode), finalization will not be
canceled. All contents on the disc
will be erased after being
formatted and the disc will be a
finalized DVD-RW (VR mode)
and recordable.
If you choose “VF mode” above,
finalization will be canceled.
• To quit formatting, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button.
• It may not be possible to format a
dirty or scratched disc. Such a
disc cannot be used.
• This camcorder may not
recognize some discs or cards that
were formatted on a PC or
another device.
• If you connect the camcorder and
your PC using the USB cable and
format a DVD or card set in the
camcorder, formatting may fail
and the disc or card may become
unusable.
• If the camcorder is turned off
during formatting the inserted
disc will become unusable.
Prot
Prot
Prot
ProtProtectin
ectin
ectin
ectinecting the
g the
g the
g theg the HDD/
HDD/
HDD/
HDD/ HDD/
DVD
DVD
DVD
DVDDVD
1
1
1
11
Insert
Insert
Insert
InsertInsert the di
the di
the di
the di the disc you want to prote
sc you want to prote
sc you want to prote
sc you want to protesc you want to protect
ct
ct
ctct
(if
(if
(if
(if(if the medium you want to prot
the medium you want to prot
the medium you want to prot
the medium you want to prot the medium you want to protect i
ect i
ect i
ect iect is
s
s
s s
not th
not th
not th
not thnot the HD
e HD
e HD
e HDe HDD).
D).
D).
D). D).
2
2
2
22
Press
Press
Press
Press Press , then press
, then press
, then press
, then press , then press
MENU
.
.
.
..
3
3
3
33
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “HDD Setti
ct “HDD Setti
ct “HDD Setti
ct “HDD Settict “HDD Setting” or “DVD
ng” or “DVD
ng” or “DVD
ng” or “DVD ng” or “DVD
Setti
Setti
Setti
SettiSetting”
ng”
ng”
ng” ng” F
F
F
F For “HDD Setting”,
or “HDD Setting”,
or “HDD Setting”,
or “HDD Setting”,or “HDD Setting”, select
select
select
select select
“Pro
“Pro
“Pro
“Pro“Protect
tect
tect
tecttect HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD HDD” th
” th
” th
” th” then pre
en pre
en pre
en preen press the
ss the
ss the
ss the ss the
confirm
confirm
confirm
confirmconfirmatio
atio
atio
atioation butto
n butto
n butto
n button button. Lik
n. Lik
n. Lik
n. Likn. Likew
ew
ew
ewewise
ise
ise
iseise, fo
, fo
, fo
, fo, for
r
r
r r
“DV
“DV
“DV
“DV“DVD Se
D Se
D Se
D SeD Setting
tting
tting
ttingtting”, select
”, select
”, select
”, select”, select “Prot
“Prot
“Prot
“Prot “Protect DV
ect DV
ect DV
ect DVect DVD
D
D
DD”,
”,
”,
”, ”,
then
then
then
thenthen press th
press th
press th
press th press the co
e co
e co
e coe confirm
nfirm
nfirm
nfirmnfirmation b
ation b
ation b
ation bation button
utton
utton
uttonutton.
.
.
..
The confirmation screen appears.
4
4
4
44
Sele
Sele
Sele
SeleSelect “YES
ct “YES
ct “YES
ct “YESct “YES”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr
”, then pr”, then press
ess
ess
essess the
the
the
the the
confirmat
confirmat
confirmat
confirmatconfirmation button.
ion button.
ion button.
ion button.ion button.
• To quit protecting, select “NO”
before pressing the confirmation
button.
• To cancel the protect setting,
repeat the same steps to select
“Unprotect HDD” or “Unprotect
Disc” in step 3.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW
-RW
-RW
-RW-RW (V
(V
(V
(V (VR
R
R
RR)
)
)
))

114
You can check the available recording
space on the HDD or a DVD
(remaining recording duration) for
recording movies, or on a memory
card (the number of recordable stills)
for recording stills, in the LCD
monitor.
If you insert a DVD-RAM that
includes photos recorded on another
HITACHI camcorder, the scenes on
the disc will be displayed on the disc
navigation screen in the order of
recording, regardless of whether they
are movies or stills in the default
setting.
However, you can also display only
movies or stills independently (in the
order of recording) by changing the
“Category” setting.
(Note that this camcorder cannot
record photos on the HDD or a DVD.)
Check
Check
Check
CheckChecking th
ing th
ing th
ing thing the
e
e
e e
Remainin
Remainin
Remainin
RemaininRemaining Recording
g Recording
g Recording
g Recordingg Recording
Capac
Capac
Capac
CapacCapacity on
ity on
ity on
ity onity on the
the
the
the the
Medium
Medium
Medium
MediumMedium (Capacit
(Capacit
(Capacit
(Capacit (Capacity)
y)
y)
y)y)
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
MENU
3
3
3
33
The information of the chosen
medium appears on the screen.
4
4
4
44
C
C
C
CC
The display returns to record pause
screen.
This camcorder may not be able to
release the disc protection that was
set by another device. In such a
case, use the original device to
release the protection.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
Displaying M
Displaying M
Displaying M
Displaying MDisplaying Movies or
ovies or
ovies or
ovies or ovies or
Stills Ind
Stills Ind
Stills Ind
Stills IndStills Independently
ependently
ependently
ependently ependently
(Cat
(Cat
(Cat
(Cat(Category)
egory)
egory)
egory)egory)
1
1
1
11
MENU
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
Category
options Explanation
ALL
Movies and stills are
displayed at the same time.
VIDEO
Only movies are displayed.
PHOTO
Only stills are displayed.
Once you close disc navigation
screen, the “Category” setting
returns to “All”.

115
Connect the camcorder to the TV using the provided AV/S cable as shown in the
illustration below.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
• Before connecting, always turn down the volume of your TV set, to prevent
feedback noise (howling) from your TV speakers.
• Insert the connector cables straight into the terminals. Inserting them at an
angle may cause the terminals to break.
AV/S cable
(provided)
Audio Input
R L
red white
or
yellow
Video
Input S-Video
Input*
Signal flow
S
* If your TV has this terminal, connect the S-Video connector instead of
the Video connector.
or

116
• Refer to your TV’s operation manual on how to switch the TV input.
The image shown in the camcorder’s LCD monitor appears on the TV screen,
allowing you to view playback, recording, and editing on the large screen of
your TV.
When the camcorder is connected to the TV, you can suppress camcorder’s on-
screen information appearing on the TV screen. (The on-screen information always
appear in the camcorder’s LCD screen regardless of this setting.)
MENU
• Volume can be adjusted on your TV.
• When operating the camcorder while viewing your TV screen, using the
provided remote control is convenient. However, if you are using other
Hitachi-brand A/V devices, they may be operated by the camcorder’s remote
control. In this event, change remote control code.
• If you have a wide-screen TV (screen ratio 16:9), and the TV is set to wide
mode, the disc navigation screen may not fit within the TV screen. In this
case, change your TV’s wide mode setting. (Refer to your TV’s operation
manual.)
• Do not leave the camcorder’s Menu screen and disc navigation screen
displayed on your TV screen for too long. Doing so may cause damage
(ghosting) on your TV screen.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW

117
If you connect the camcorder to a 4:3 TV and play a disc recorded in “16:9” (wide)
mode, the image on the TV will be vertically distorted. In this case, set “TV Type”
to “4:3” so that you can obtain the image of the correct aspect ratio. (You will see
black bands that will adjust the image aspect ratio on top and bottom of the TV
screen.).
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
ENTER RETURN
16 :9
T V Ty p e
O t h e r s
4:3

118
A DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R disc recorded/dubbed on this camcorder is not
playable on another device such as a DVD recorder/player unless the disc is
finalized. Finalize a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R using this camcorder.
A DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR mode) disc recorded/dubbed on this camcorder can
be played on a DVD recorder/player that supports 8 cm DVD-RAM/DVD-RW
(VR mode) without finalizing it. However, you need to finalize a DVD-RW (VR
mode) disc using this camcorder before importing scenes from the disc to your PC.
You can:
zRecord or edit scenes using the
camcorder.
You cannot:
zPlay back the disc on a device
(DVD recorder/player) other than
the camcorder.
You can:
zPlay back the disc on a device
(DVD recorder/player) other than
the camcorder.
zImport scenes to your PC.
zUnfinalize the DVD-RW (VF
mode) disc and use it for recording
scenes.
You cannot:
zRecord or edit scenes using the
camcorder.
zA +RW disc set in the camcorder
will be automatically finalized
when you remove it from the
camcorder or when you connect
the camcorder to a PC (auto
finalization).
zYou can add recordings on an auto-
finalized +RW disc.
zAn auto-finalized +RW disc can be
played on other devices such as a
DVD recorder/player; however, no
DVD video menu will appear. To
have the DVD video menu
displayed, finalize the +RW disc
from the disc navigation screen on
the camcorder.
zAn unfinalized +RW disc is
recordable.
About DVD-RW
About DVD-RW
About DVD-RW
About DVD-RWAbout DVD-RW (VF
(VF
(VF
(VF (VF
mode)/DVD-R Discs
mode)/DVD-R Discs
mode)/DVD-R Discs
mode)/DVD-R Discs mode)/DVD-R Discs
and Fin
and Fin
and Fin
and Finand Finalization
alization
alization
alizationalization
About +RW Di
About +RW Di
About +RW Di
About +RW DiAbout +RW Discs and
scs and
scs and
scs and scs and
Finaliza
Finaliza
Finaliza
FinalizaFinalization
tion
tion
tiontion

119
A DVD-RW (VR mode) disc recorded
on this camcorder can be played back
on a DVD recorder/player that
supports 8 cm DVD-RW (VR mode)
without finalizing it.
zBefore importing scenes to your
PC from DVD-RW (VR mode),
you need to finalize the disc using
the disc navigation screen on the
camcorder.
zYou can use a finalized DVD-RW
(VR mode) disc for recording
scenes.
zOnce finalized, you cannot
unfinalize the disc. Formatting the
disc will not unfinalize it.
A DVD-RAM disc recorded on this
camcorder can be played back on a
DVD recorder/player that supports 8
cm DVD-RAM without finalizing it.
zDo not insert a DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R disc which was
recorded or dubbed, but not
finalized, on this camcorder into
another recording device, such as a
DVD recorder and DVD drive of a
PC. The recorded data may be
damaged.
zAlthough discs recorded (and
finalized) on this camcorder can be
played back on recording/playing
devices which comply with
specific discs or recording modes,
playback of all discs under all
conditions is not guaranteed. If
playback is not possible, use this
camcorder to play back your disc.
zPlayback may stop for a moment
temporarily between scenes while
playing on a DVD recorder/player.
zIf you record or finalize a DVD-
RW (VF mode)/DVD-R disc
which was recorded or dubbed, but
not finalized, on this camcorder
using another DVD camcorder, the
recorded data may be damaged.
zA DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW that
has been finalized using a PC or
DVD recorder may not be playable
on this camcorder depending on
the editing software or recording
status of the disc.
zIf you insert a DVD-R disc
recorded on another Hitachi
camcorder into this camcorder, the
disc navigation screen will appear
Abou
Abou
Abou
AbouAbout DVD-RW (V
t DVD-RW (V
t DVD-RW (V
t DVD-RW (Vt DVD-RW (VR
R
R
R R
Mode) Dis
Mode) Dis
Mode) Dis
Mode) DisMode) Discs and
cs and
cs and
cs and cs and
Fina
Fina
Fina
FinaFinalization
lization
lization
lizationlization
Playing
Playing
Playing
PlayingPlaying back a DVD-
back a DVD-
back a DVD-
back a DVD- back a DVD-
RAM Disc on a DVD
RAM Disc on a DVD
RAM Disc on a DVD
RAM Disc on a DVD RAM Disc on a DVD
Player
Player
Player
PlayerPlayer/Recorder
/Recorder
/Recorder
/Recorder/Recorder
Notes on Finali
Notes on Finali
Notes on Finali
Notes on FinaliNotes on Finalization
zation
zation
zationzation

120
automatically. You cannot record
or finalize such discs using this
camcorder.
zDo not insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R
disc recorded, but not finalized, on
a recorder manufactured by a
company other than Hitachi into
this camcorder. Doing so may
make the disc unusable.
You must finalize a DVD-RW (VF
mode)/DVD-R/+RW disc recorded/
dubbed on this camcorder before
playing it back using a DVD recorder/
player compatible with 8 cm discs.
Note that no further recording/
dubbing is possible for a finalized
DVD-R.
Likewise, no further recording/
dubbing is possible for a finalized
DVD-RW (VF mode), though, you
can unfinalize it to enable further
recording/dubbing.
There may be a case for a DVD-RW
(VR mode) that finalization is needed,
however, further recording/dubbing is
possible without unfinalizing it.
Finalizin
Finalizin
Finalizin
FinalizinFinalizing a Disc
g a Disc
g a Disc
g a Discg a Disc
1
1
1
11 • You cannot finalize if a battery
pack is used as a power source.
2
2
2
22 MENU
-R
-R
-R
-R-RW
W
W
WW (VR)
(VR)
(VR)
(VR) (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (
-RW (
-RW (
-RW (-RW (VF)
VF)
VF)
VF)VF) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
3
3
3
33
A confirmation screen for
finalization appears.
4
4
4
44
The message showing that the
DVD is being finalized will
appear, and then the disc will be
finalized.
When finalization is complete,
the disc navigation screen will
appear.
• “ ” appears on the disc
navigation screen for a
finalized disc.
ENTER
F i n a l i z e ? ( A p p r o . 3 m i n . )x
F u r t h e r r e c o r d i n g o n t h i s
D V D w i l l b e i m p o s s i b l e .
F i n a l i z e D V D
YES NO
*
*2
1
0 01/ 01 5A l l P r o g r a
m
s
PLAY PHOTO SELECT
*1 Displayed only when a
DVD-R is used.
*2 Varies depending on the
length of recordings.
Finalized DVD

121
You can unfinalize a DVD-RW (VF
mode)/+RW disc finalized on this
camcorder so that additional recording
can be done on it.
TOP PREV NEXT END
001/ 010
1 2 / 1 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 5 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 7 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 1 0 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 1 5 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 1 8 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 2 0 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
1 2 / 2 3 / 2 0 0 8
8 : 0 0 A M
The screen above is an
example when a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW is
viewed on a DVD player.
• If the disc in the camcorder has
already been finalized, “Finalize
Disc” does not appear in the
Menu.
• The time required to finalize that
appears on the “Finalize DVD”
screen is only for reference.
• In case of a DVD-R, it takes
longer to finalize it if recording
length is short.
• For a DVD-RW/+RW which has
previously been finalized, the
next finalization may be quicker.
Unfinalizin
Unfinalizin
Unfinalizin
UnfinalizinUnfinalizing a Disc
g a Disc
g a Disc
g a Discg a Disc
1
1
1
11 MENU
2
2
2
22
A confirmation screen for
unfinalization appears.
3
3
3
33 The message showing that the
disc is being unfinalized will
appear, and then the disc will be
unfinalized.
-RW (
-RW (
-RW (
-RW (-RW (VF)
VF)
VF)
VF)VF) +RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
A finalized DVD-RW (VR mode)
can be recorded as is, without
being unfinalized.

122
(The DZ-HS803A does not have this (external input) feature.)
Make the connection between the camcorder and the other A/V device using the
provided AV/S input/output cable as shown in the illustration below.
The playback image appears in the camcorder’s LCD monitor.
Recording (dubbing) begins.
• Recording procedures are the same as described in“Recording Movies to the
HDD” (p.24) or “Recording Movies to a DVD” (p.25).
• When you capture a still picture, press PHOTO/SELECT.
• When the power is turned off, the “Input Source” setting returns to
“CAMERA”.
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDDHDD RAM
RAM
RAM
RAMRAM -RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)
-RW (VR)-RW (VR) R
R
R
RR
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF
-RW (VF-RW (VF)
)
)
)) CARD
CARD
CARD
CARDCARD
+RW
+RW
+RW
+RW+RW
• Before making the connection, turn off both the camcorder and the other A/
V device.
• Connect the camcorder to a wall outlet instead of using the battery pack to
secure the power supply during dubbing.
• If the other A/V device is HITACHI brand, the A/V device may respond to
the camcorder’s remote control. In such a case, change the remote control
code of the other A/V device.
AV/S cable
(provided)
To A/V terminal
To the audio/
video inputs of
the other A/V
device
Signal flow
* The S-Video connector is unusable.
*

123
• The recorded contents can be played back in the same manner as when playing
back images recorded on this camcorder.
• Images not privately recorded may be copy protected by the copy-guard signal
to protect the copyright. In such a case, “COPY PROTECTED” appears on the
camcorder’s LCD screen and you cannot proceed with recording. Typical
copyright protected materials are commercially available DVD movies, pay-
TV programs, etc.
• Some images privately recorded and without copy-guard signals may not be
recorded properly depending on the signal conditions.
• When recorded images are played back on a PC, black bands may appear at the
edges of the screen.
• If the input signal is interrupted, for example, by switching the channel on the
TV or switching input using the video selector, recording cannot be performed
properly.
If you wish to turn off the information superimposed on the image, press
camcorder’s DISPLAY repeatedly.

124
Make the connection between the camcorder and the other A/V device using the
provided AV/S input/output cable as shown in the illustration below.
AV/S cable
(provided)
To A/V terminal
To the audio/
video inputs of
the other A/V
device
Signal flow
* Connect the S-Video connector if available for the other A/V device
for better picture quality.
To the S-Video
input*
• Sounds are reproduced from the camcorder’s speaker.
• You can create a playlist (p.96) in advance to dub only scenes you wish to
record to.

125
The USB cable and CD-ROM
software provided with the camcorder
will allow you to use the movies and
stills recorded on this camcorder on
your PC.
The included CD-ROM contains the
software for both Windows and
Macintosh.
This allows you to import the images
recorded on the camcorder to your PC.
You can play back imported images
and edit movies, for example, cut-edit
them, add titles and BGM, and add
image switching effects, etc.
You can also create a DVD-video
(DVD-RW/DVD-R) and DVD-VR
(DVD-RAM/DVD-RW).
This allows you to import the images
recorded on the camcorder to a
Macintosh as an MPEG file.
You can play back imported images
and edit movies, for example, cut-edit
them, etc.
You can also create a DVD-Video
(DVD-RW/DVD-R).
The following table shows whether or
not reading from/writing to a
camcorder’s medium is possible.
*1 Writing to a card using Explorer/
Finder is possible.
*2 A DVD-VR (DVD-RAM/DVD-RW
(VR mode)) cannot be created.
OS Read/
Write
Medium
HDD DVD Card
Windows
Read
z z z
Write –
z
–*
1
Macintosh
Read
z z z
Write – –*
2
–*
1
• A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
recorded on this camcorder must
be finalized on this camcorder
before using it in your PC.
• You cannot create a DVD-VR
(DVD-RAM/DVD-RW) on
Macintosh software.
• Since the audio format of an
MPEG file imported to a
Macintosh using ImageMixer 3
Mac Edition for DVDCAM will
be AC3 audio, no audio will be
played back with QuickTime,
even after installing the optional
MPEG-2 playback component;
only video is played back. To
play back the imported MPEG
file, use ImageMixer 3 Mac
Edition.
• Discs such as AACS, CPRM, or
CSS, which are copyright
protected, are not compatible
with the software provided with
this camcorder.
• The software provided with this
camcorder cannot be used to write
to the camcorder’s HDD/+RW.

126
The provided software is compatible
for Japanese, English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese
(simplified characters) users.
Screen shots in this manual use
Windows XP screens for Windows
and Mac OS X 10.4 screens for
Macintosh.
Before opening the software CD-
ROM, please read "Be sure to
read the following before opening
the package of CD-ROM"
(p.182).
OS
Windows® 2000 Professional SP3 or later
Windows® XP Home Edition/Professional
Windows Vista®
* 64-bit Edition is excluded.
* To use this software, you must log in as administrator.
PC IBM® PC/AT® adapter (DOS/V PC)
CPU
Intel® Pentium® III 800 MHz or greater
(Intel® Pentium® 4 1.7 GHz or greater is recommended.)
* Operation is not guaranteed for PCs to which any alteration,
such as overclocking, had been added from the original
specifications.
Memory
• Windows® 2000 : 128MB or greater (256MB or greater is
recommended.)
• Windows® XP : 256MB or greater (512MB or greater is
recommended.)
• Windows Vista® : 512MB or greater (1GB or greater is
recommended.)
HDD
The following free space is needed:
• At time of installing the software: 300 MB or more
• At time of disc creation: approx. 3 times that of the capacity
of the disc to be created
USB
At least one or more USB 1.1 or 2.0 free ports are necessary.
(May not operate if the camcorder is connected through a USB
hub.)
Others
• Display screen of 1024×768 pixel, 16 bit (High color) or
greater
• Video device compliant with Direct X® 9.0c or greater
version
• Sound output device

127
OS Mac OS X v10.3.9, v10.4, v10.5
* The provided software cannot be used on a Mac OS X Server.
CPU PowerPC G4 1 GHz or higher, PowerPC G5, Intel Core
Memory 256 MB or greater (512 MB or greater is recommended.)
HDD
The following free space is needed:
• At time of installing the software: Approx. 50 MB
• At time of disc creation: approx. 2 times or more that of the
capacity of the disc to be created
Graphic At least 1024 × 768 pixels (full-color is recommended.)
USB
At least one or more USB 1.1 or 2.0 free ports are necessary.
(May not operate if the camcorder is connected through a USB
hub.)
Compatible
drive SuperDrive mounted in Macintosh in standard
The slot-in type drive of Macintosh is not compatible with 8 cm discs (as
of August 2008). Be sure not to use this type of drive, since a disc inserted
by mistake cannot be removed.
• You must have the administrator authority of the PC before installing
software.
• Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases:
– When connected via a USB hub
– When used on a custom-made PC
• Even if your PC satisfies the system requirements, operation malfunctions
and limitations in use may occur depending on the combinations of other
software and devices you are using.

128
1
1
1
11 If you are using your PC for other
applications, quit all software you
are using.
2
2
2
22
The software installer
automatically starts up, and the
“Choose Setup Language” screen
automatically appears.
If the “Choose Setup Language”
screen does not appear, open the
drive in which the CD-ROM is
contained using Windows’ My
Computer or Explorer, and double
click “Setup.exe”.
3
3
3
33 Select the installation language,
then click “Next”.
4
4
4
44
5
5
5
55
Read the software license
agreement carefully. If you agree
with the terms, select “I accept the
terms of the license agreement.”,
then click “Next”.
6
6
6
66
If there is no change to the
installation destination, click
“Next”. If you wish to change the
installation destination, click
“Change” and specify the
installation destination, then click
“Next”.

129
7
7
7
77
8
8
8
88
Preparations for installation are
now complete. Click “Install” to
begin the installation process.
9
9
9
99
Software installation is now
complete.
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
3
3
3
33
The installer will start.
Click “Continue”, then the
operating environment and
restrictions will be displayed.
Read them carefully, then click
“Continue”, then the license
agreement screen will appear.
After completing software
installation, Direct X
® installation
may commence depending on your
PC. In this event, follow the screen
indications to install it.

131
Make connections as illustrated below. The PC will automatically recognize the
camcorder and sometimes prompt you to restart the PC.
Restart the PC if prompted.
USB cable (provided)
To USB terminal
To USB terminal
PC
• The USB cable does not supply power to the camcorder. Use the AC adapter/
charger to power the camcorder.
• Before connecting, disconnect any cables other than the USB cable and AC
adapter/charger.
• The camcorder’s ACCESS/PC indicator will light green after making the
connection. The indicator will light or flash orange, while the HDD or a disc
is being accessed.
• The camcorder’s CARD ACCESS indicator will light or flash red while an
SD memory card is being accessed.
• Nothing will appear on the camcorder’s LCD monitor while the camcorder is
connected to the PC.
• If you use a USB1.1 port instead of a USB2.0 port, playback may not be
smooth and the process may take more time.
• For precautions when connecting to a PC, see p.145.

132
If the camcorder is set to HDD or
DVD mode and connected to your PC,
it will be recognized as a disc drive.
If the camcorder is set to SD mode and
connected to a PC, it will be
recognized as a removable disc.
Photos are recorded on an SD memory
card in JPEG format. Use an
application that can handle JPEG
images.
The following shows how to import
photos to your PC:
Insert an SD memory card with photos
into the camcorder, and connect it to a
PC. Double-click the removable disc
icon displayed on the screen. The
contents of the card will appear.
The photos of the card are stored in the
“DCIM” - “100*HPNX1” folder.
Drag and drop them to the PC to
import them.
* The number may differ if the card was
recorded on another DCF conforming
device.
zTurning the power off.
zSwitching to another medium on
the camcorder
(Do not move the power switch
once you have connected to the
PC.)
zHDD/DVD file operations using
Explorer/Finder
(Use the provided software.)
zCamcorder operations using the
operation buttons of the camcorder
zEjecting a disc by pressing down
the DISC EJECT switch of the
camcorder.
The disc or card set in the camcorder
can be removed/replaced by operating
the connected PC without turning off
the camcorder or disconnecting the
PC.
The icon and drive name may vary
depending on the software
environment you are using.
Do not directly handle files on the
HDD or DVD in the camcorder
using Explorer/Finder. Doing so
may cause valuable image data to
be lost and damage the medium and
render it unusable. Please use the
provided software.

133
Select the camcorder’s drive icon
using Windows Explorer or My
Computer.
→ Click the right button on your
mouse.
→ Select “Eject”.
→ The camcorder’s disc compartment
lid will open.
If you insert a different DVD and
close the lid, the DVD will be
recognized.
Place the drive icon of this camcorder
(displayed on desktop) in Trash Box:
Then the lid of the camcorder’s disc
compartment will open. Load another
disc and close the lid, then the disc
will be recognized.
To make sure the SD memory card is
not being accessed by the PC, check
that the CARD ACCESS indicator on
the camcorder (p.15) is not lit or
flashing. Then, remove the SD
memory card from the camcorder.
Note that the CARD ACCESS
indicator may be lit or flashing for a
while after a file on the PC is written
to the SD memory card. Wait until the
CARD ACCESS indicator goes out. It
will sometimes take several minutes.
Drag the drive icon (displayed on
desktop) and place it in the Trash.
After making sure that the icon
disappears from the desktop, remove
the SD memory card from the card slot
of the camcorder.
If your PC’s DVD drive and software
conform to the standards of the DVD
recorded on the camcorder, you can
directly insert the DVD into the DVD
drive to use it.
Note that the DVD drive can handle
only DVDs whose types conform to
the DVD drive. You may need to
change the DVD drive depending on
the type of DVD recorded on the
camcorder.
A finalized DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
can be used with a DVD-ROM drive
(reading only).
Macintosh slot-in type drives
are not compatible with 8 cm
discs (as of August 2008). Do not
use this type of drive, since a
disc inserted by mistake cannot
be removed.

134
1
1
1
11
Quit the application and click the
“Safely Remove Hardware” icon in
the task tray at the bottom right of
the Windows display screen.
• If you wish to write images onto a
new DVD-RW using your PC, do
not format the disc using the
camcorder.
• Some upright or slot load PC disc
drives are not compatible with 8
cm discs.
• Adapters to convert 8 cm into
12 cm diameter CDs (for
8 cm CDs) are not compatible for
use with 8 cm DVD-RAM/
8 cm DVD-RW/8 cm DVD-R/
8 cm +RW.
• Finalize a DVD-RW/DVD-R/
+RW recorded on the camcorder
before using it on the PC (p.120).
• Some DVD-ROM drives cannot
read a DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
recorded on the camcorder.
2
2
2
22 The drive name (E:, etc.) will differ
according to your PC.
3
3
3
33
Disconnect the USB cable.
If an error occurs during the
Safely Remove Hardware
procedure, shut down
Windows® and detach the USB
cable.
When you are using Windows
®
2000 Professional, installing
Windows
®
2000 SP3 or later OS
updates may solve the problem.
For instructions on how to obtain
Windows 2000 SP3, refer to your
PC maker or Microsoft
Corporation.

135
Firstly, dismount the camcorder’s
medium by selecting the drive icon of
the camcorder (HDD, DVD, or card),
and select “Eject” in the “File” menu.
Disconnect the USB cable.
See p.140 if you are a Macintosh user.
ImageMixer 3 allows you to import
images recorded on the camcorder to
the PC. You can then edit video file(s),
and create a DVD-Video or DVD-VR
using the video file(s).
The following shows the basic
operations of ImageMixer 3.
For detailed instructions about
ImageMixer 3, refer to the PDF file
instruction manual installed with the
software. To display the PDF manual,
click “Help (H)” - “ImageMixer Help
(H) F1” while ImageMixer 3 is
running.
Explanations (for example, on how to
edit video files) are described in the
PDF manual.
To start ImageMixer 3, double-click
the ImageMixer 3 shortcut that was
created when it was installed.
* If there is no ImageMixer 3 shortcut
on the desktop, select [Start] -
[Programs] or [All Programs] -
[PIXELA] - [ImageMixer 3] -
[ImageMixer 3].
* A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
recorded on this camcorder must be
finalized using this camcorder
(p.120).
How to Use
How to Use
How to Use
How to UseHow to Use the
the
the
the the
Software
Software
Software
SoftwareSoftware
1
1
1
11
• If you want to use images
recorded on a DVD, insert the
DVD into the camcorder before
making the USB connection.
2
2
2
22 When ImageMixer 3 starts up, the
launcher screen will appear.
3
3
3
33
For movies recorded on a +RW, no
recording date/time will appear on
ImageMixer 3.

136
Store images recorded on the
camcorder onto your PC, then you can
create a DVD that you can play back
using your DVD recorder/player.
4
4
4
44 The recorded images on the
camcorder’s medium you chose
will be displayed.
5
5
5
55
The playback screen will appear
and playback will start.
• Double-click the playback screen
for full-screen display. To exit
the full-screen display, double-
click the screen again.
• To play back images on another
DVD, click the Eject button in
the bottom left of the library
screen with playback stopped.
The disc compartment of the
camcorder will open. Replace the
DVD.
1
1
1
11
When ImageMixer 3 starts up, the
launcher screen will appear.
Click “Create DVD-Video”.
2
2
2
22 The project settings screen will
appear.

137
3
3
3
33
Check the project settings screen
where you can specify file save
location, video format, and
picture quality, and change the
settings if necessary. Note that
you need to select “NTSC” as a
video format for use in the USA.
Then click “OK”.
4
4
4
44
The “ImageMixer 3 DVD
Authoring” screen showing the
images recorded on the HDD/
DVD will appear.
5
5
5
55
• To import images on another
disc, click the Eject button and
replace the disc. After a few
moments, the images on the disc
will appear. Repeat the
procedure to import more
images. (When images on a
DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/
+RW disc are imported, the
recording date/time will not
appear.)
• To import all chapters in a title
at one time, click “Select all” in
the editing menu at the top of
the screen, and then click the
“Import” button.
• To import multiple chapters,
click the desired chapters while
holding down the Ctrl key.

138
6
6
6
66
The video files you just imported
will appear under “Source”.
Choose the desired video file, and
click “Add titles” to register the
file.
To register a previously imported
video file (using ImageMixer 3),
click “File” to choose the folder in
which the video file is stored.
• Clicking “Theme” or “Set title
menu” will allow you to change
the design of the DVD-Video
menu.
7
7
7
77
8
8
8
88
9
9
9
99
The confirmation screen will
appear.
10
10
10
1010
Writing will start.
When writing is complete, the
drive will open to eject the DVD.
Congratulations! Your original
DVD is now finished.
Summer Memo ry
Summer Memo ry

139
• If you load a written DVD-RW
into the write drive, the dialog
“Are you sure you want to delete
the content of disc?” will appear.
Deleting the content of the disc
will erase all data on the disc.
Carefully check the contents of
the disc beforehand.
Choosing “Yes” will display the
disc erasure screen. After
checking it, click the “OK”
button. Once the contents on the
disc have been deleted, the disc
compartment on the camcorder
will open. Close the cover
following the message
instructions.
• If the disc contains a video file
that does not conform to DVD-
Video format, the video will be
reformatted, resulting in
deterioration of image quality.
• If you click “File” - “Save
project” before writing is
complete, the operation status can
be saved as a project file. You can
open this saved project file later
to restart the operation from the
saved status.
• A project file will be saved in the
project folder that was designated
when images were saved, and the
file name will be automatically
attached.
• If a video recorded on the HDD in
this camcorder for extended
hours is too long for one disc, cut/
edit the video so that it can be
recorded on one disc. See the on-
line instruction manual of
ImageMixer 3 for cut-editing of
videos. To display the
ImageMixer 3 manual, choose
“Help”, and then “ImageMixer 3
Help (H) F1”, while ImageMixer
3 is being executed.

140
ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition for
DVDCAM allows you to import
images recorded on the camcorder to a
Macintosh as a video file. You can
play back a video file, edit it and
create a DVD-Video.
The following shows the basic
operations of ImageMixer 3 Mac
Edition for DVDCAM.
Refer to the PDF manual installed
with the software for detailed
instructions of ImageMixer 3 Mac
Edition for DVDCAM.
To open the PDF manual, click “Help”
- “ImageMixer 3 Help” while
ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition is running.
To start ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition,
double-click the “ImageMixer 3 for
DVDCAM” icon in the Macintosh HD
(startup disk) - “Applications” -
“ImageMixer 3 for DVDCAM”.
* A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
recorded on this camcorder must be
finalized using this camcorder
(p.120).
• The provided software cannot be
used to burn a DVD-VR (DVD-
RAM/DVD-RW) disc.
• With scenes recorded on a DVD-
RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW
disc, no recording date/time will
appear on ImageMixer 3 Mac
Edition for DVDCAM.
1
1
1
11
• If you want to use images
recorded on a DVD, insert the
DVD into the camcorder before
making the USB connection.
2
2
2
22
The images recorded on the HDD
(DVD when DVD is chosen) will
appear.

141
ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition allows you
to import movies recorded on the
HDD/DVD of this camcorder to your
Macintosh as MPEG files.
Using ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition,
you can play back the imported video
files, combine images, cut-edit them,
and create a DVD-Video.
* A DVD-RW/DVD-R/+RW
recorded on this camcorder must be
finalized using this camcorder
(p.120).
3
3
3
33
The playback screen will appear
and the movie will be played back.
The DVD player may start
automatically when you insert a
DVD in the camcorder or the
Macintosh drive. To cancel
automatic start of the DVD player:
from the “Apple” menu, choose
“System Preferences” -
“CDs&DVDs” - “When you insert
a video DVD” - “Ignore”.
1
1
1
11
• When connecting the camcorder
to a Macintosh for playback on a
DVD player, etc., the screen for
setting the drive region code will
appear. Set the region code that
matches your local area (“1” in
the USA”).
• Normal playback may not be
possible, depending on the record
status of the disc.

142
2
2
2
22
Importing will start.
3
3
3
33
Importing will start.
4
4
4
44
The video files imported to the
Macintosh will appear in a list as
shown below.
• To play back a file, select one
from the library screen and click
the Playback button at the
bottom of screen. Also, clicking
the “Movie Edit” icon allows
you to cut-edit the video.
• Refer to the PDF instruction
manual of ImageMixer 3 for
details on use (p.140).
If you click “Recently Imported
Files” in “Smart Album” on the
left of the screen, only the files
recently imported will
automatically appear.
If you designate a specific
condition, such as title, Smart
Album will also automatically
display the matching video files.
For detailed use of Smart Album,
refer to “How to Use” - “Creating
Albums” - “Creating Smart
Albums” in the PDF manual.

143
After storing the images recorded on
the camcorder onto your Macintosh
(p.141), you can create a DVD-Video
(DVD-RW/DVD-R) playable on your
DVD recorder/player.
1
1
1
11
2
2
2
22
The video files imported to the
Macintosh will appear in a list as
shown below.
3
3
3
33
The DVD specification screen
will appear.
4
4
4
44
The created DVD list will be
added.
• The DVD list is registered as
“Untitled”. Double-click
“Untitled” to change the name
of the DVD list. The name of
the DVD list will become the
name of the disc.

144
5
5
5
55
Before clicking “Write”, you can
double check the video files in the
DVD list. Select the video file you
wish to check and click the
Playback icon at the bottom of the
screen.
• You can also use Album or
Smart Album to easily prepare a
DVD creation list, by choosing
the video files to create a DVD-
Video with, and then clicking
“DVD List” at the bottom of the
screen.
• Even after creating a DVD list,
you can drag a video file from
the library and drop it on the
DVD list on the left of screen to
add the file.
• While a DVD list is displayed,
click the Utility Menu button at
the bottom of the screen and
select “Edit DVD List”. You
can reselect and set the DVD
menu design, the size of the
DVD disc, and the picture
The writing screen will appear
after clicking “Write”.
6
6
6
66
Writing to DVD will start.
• If you wish to create multiple
DVDs with the same contents,
choose “Yes” for the message
“Do you want to create another
disc?” that will be displayed
after a DVD is created.
• If you load a written DVD-RW
in the write drive, the prompt
“Are you sure you want to
delete the contents of disc?” will
appear.
Deleting the content of disc will
erase all data on the disc.
Carefully check the content of
the disc before erasing.
• If the disc contains a video file
that does not conform to DVD-
Video format, the video will be
formatted, resulting in
deterioration of image quality.

145
Use “Control Panel” to open “Add or
Remove Applications”, select the
application to be uninstalled from the
displayed list of applications, and then
click the “Change/Remove” button.
Drag and drop the following folders/
files to the Recycle Bin:
z/Application/ImageMixer 3 for
DVDCAM
z/User/Movies/ImageMixer 3 for
DVDCAM
z/User/Library/Application
Support/ImageMixer 3 for
DVDCAM
z/User/Library/Preferences/
com.PIXELA.ImageMixer
3.DVDCAM.plist
z/Library/Receipts/ImageMixer 3
for DVDCAM.pkg
z
z
z
zz When connecting the camcorder
to a PC, use the AC adapter/
charger as a power source.
Although you can also use the battery
pack, if the camcorder power is cut
during data transfer, your valuable
recorded data may be lost. If this occurs
while writing to disc, the disc will no
longer be usable.
z
z
z
zz While accessing the camcorder
from a PC, do not plug or unplug
the cables.
If you plug or unplug the USB cable
(provided) or the power source (power
cable and DC power cord) while the
ACCESS/PC indicator or CARD
ACCESS indicator is lit or flashing,
your valuable recorded data may be lost.
If this occurs while writing to disc, the
disc will no longer be usable.
z
z
z
zz When you connect this
camcorder to your PC, disconnect
all the cables except for the AC
adapter/charger and the USB
cable.
z
z
z
zz Make sure the camcorder does
not overheat. (Operations
conducted with the camcorder
and PC connected should be
limited to a rough standard of
approx. 30 minutes within
environmental conditions at
approx. 86°F (30°C).)
If the camcorder overheats, camcorder
operations may not function properly. In
particular, if an error occurs while
writing to DVD-R, the disc will no
longer be usable. Make sure to prevent
the camcorder from overheating. As
extended time will be required to import
lengthy scenes recorded to the HDD to
your PC, make sure that the camcorder
does not overheat.
• After uninstalling the software,
restart your PC.
• Administrative privileges are
required to conduct
uninstallation.
• “User” will depend on the login
user name.
• Administrative privileges are
required to conduct
uninstallation.
Prec
Prec
Prec
PrecPrecautio
autio
autio
autioautions When
ns When
ns When
ns Whenns When
Conn
Conn
Conn
ConnConnectin
ectin
ectin
ectinecting to a PC
g to a PC
g to a PC
g to a PCg to a PC

146
z
z
z
zz The provided software does not
import the camcorder’s editing
features, such as the fade
settings and Playlist contents.
z
z
z
zz If the camcorder is connected via
a USB hub or to a USB port on the
PC’s front panel or keyboard, the
camcorder may not be recognized
by the PC. If this happens,
connect the camcorder to a USB
port on the PC’s rear panel.
z
z
z
zz If the camcorder power is off, it
cannot be connected to a PC.
z
z
z
zz Do not use a PC application to
finalize a DVD-RW/DVD-R
recorded on this camcorder.
Doing so will make the disc
unusable.
z
z
z
zz Although reading data from the
camcorder or writing data to the
camcorder may be possible using
software other than the provided
software, operation is not
guaranteed.
z
z
z
zz If the PC is started from suspend
mode (or sleep or standby) with
the camcorder connected to the
PC, the camcorder may not be
recognized. Disconnect the
camcorder from the PC, and
restart the PC.
z
z
z
zz Multiple camcorders cannot be
connected to the PC at the same
time.
z
z
z
zz Although it is stated that discs
created using the provided
software can be played back on
devices compliant with those
respective disc types, playback
on all devices is not guaranteed.
There are instances when
playback is not possible
depending on the playback device
or disc recording condition.
z
z
z
zz Inquiries on the software
provided with this camcorder
should be directed to the
following.
Support Center phone numbers
for software provided:
PIXELA CORPORATION
+1-800-458-4029 (Toll-free)
+1-213-341-0163
URL:
http://www.pixela.co.jp/oem/
hitachi/e/index.html
z
z
z
zz For inquiries on connecting a PC
to this camcorder:
Hitachi Camcorder PC Software
Support Center
URL:
http://dvdcam-pc.support.hitachi.ca/
Contact
Contact
Contact
ContactContact Informa
Informa
Informa
Informa Information
tion
tion
tiontion

147
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Wide conversion lens (DZ-WL1)
Tele-conversion lens (DZ-TL1)
Step-up ring (DZ-SR3037)
POWER SUPPLY
Battery (DZ-BP14SW)
Battery (DZ-BP21SW)
Refer to the instruction manual of a shoulder strap.
Opti
Opti
Opti
OptiOptional Acce
onal Acce
onal Acce
onal Acceonal Accessor
ssor
ssor
ssorssories
ies
ies
iesies
•When using camera accessories, be sure to read the instruction manuals for each accessory.
•Refer to the catalog for details.
•The models and specifications of the optional accessories shown on this page are subject to change,
and their production may be discontinued.
Atta
Atta
Atta
AttaAttaching
ching
ching
chingching the Shou
the Shou
the Shou
the Shou the Shoulder Str
lder Str
lder Str
lder Strlder Strap (Com
ap (Com
ap (Com
ap (Comap (Commercia
mercia
mercia
merciamercially
lly
lly
lly lly
Available)
Available)
Available)
Available)Available)
Pass the shoulder strap ends through
the loops of the hand strap.

148
If an error message appears while operating the camcorder, refer to the following table
for details and remedies. Messages are arranged in alphabetical order.
Error Messages
Error Messages
Error Messages
Error MessagesError Messages
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page
(1) Data error in a
part of image file.
Repair data now?
(2) Found error in
image file. Repair
data now?
(3) Data error in all
image file. Repair all
data now?
The system cannot normally complete writing of a file if
the power is turned off for some reason during recording
or editing. Selecting “YES” will automatically repair the
video file, but even if “NO” is selected, the same message
will appear when the camcorder is turned on next time.
(Do not remove the disc while the camcorder is
recognizing it. Removing the disc will deactivate the file
repair function.)
Follow the instructions on screen, taking note of the
following cautions:
•Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger to power the
camcorder when repairing data. Repair is not possible
using a battery. If a battery is attached, turn the power
switch off, connect the AC adapter/charger, and then
turn the power back on and follow the on-screen
instructions.
•If message (1) appears when using the HDD, a battery
can be used for repair (if the battery charge indicator
shows more than half charged).
•Repair will normally take several minutes, but it may
take up to one hour.
•Data may not be repaired, depending on the timing
when power was turned off.
•Data may not be repaired normally if data recorded on
another recorder is mixed in.
•The repaired data may differ from the original recorded
content due to deleted defects.
•Since the date/time for repair is added to the repaired
data (only the corrected portion for partial repair), the
original date/time information will be lost.
•Since all movies, and then all stills, are repaired, the
order of recorded contents will be lost in case of
message (2) or (3) only.
•See *1 on p.156.
—

150
CANNOT RECORD
PHOTOS
•This message will appear when the PHOTO/SELECT
button is pressed with the power switch set to “HDD”
or “DVD”.
•Photos cannot be recorded in HDD or DVD mode. Use
a card to record photos in SD mode.
27
CANNOT RECORD
VIDEO
This message will appear when the REC button is pressed
with the power switch set to “SD”. 24, 25
Cannot replace
thumbnail on
PHOTO scenes.
The thumbnail of a still cannot be changed.
Only thumbnails of movies can be changed. 108
Cannot select any
more scenes.
The maximum number of selectable scenes is 999. —
CANNOT SLEEP
MODE
The camcorder can only enter sleep mode from record
pause mode. The following conditions may also apply:
•No DVD is loaded, but the power switch is set to
“DVD”.
•No card is loaded, but the power switch is set to “SD”.
•The HDD, DVD, or card has no remaining space.
•The HDD/DVD is protected.
41
CARD ALMOST
FULL
Remaining space is only enough to record less than 10
stills.
Delete unnecessary stills and try the card, or use another
card.
102, 176
Card error has
occurred.
•The card terminals may be dirty. Wipe off dirt, and try
the card again, or use another card.
•Data other than still image may be included. Use
another card.
33
Card error has
occurred.
Format the card
now?
The card may have been formatted on a PC, or formatting
may have been interrupted. Select “YES” to format the
card. 112
Card error has
occurred.
Formatting is not
complete.
The card may be damaged. Try again or use another card.
33
Card error has
occurred. Keep card
inside & restart.
Card error could have occurred during editing of scenes.
Turn off the camcorder with the card inserted, connect the
AC adapter/charger, and then turn it on again.
38
Card full. Delete unnecessary stills, or use another card.
102, 176
Card is not
formatted.
Format the card
now?
Was the card formatted on PC? Select “YES” to format
the card. 112
CHECK CARD The inserted card cannot be used in this camcorder. Use
another card. 33
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

151
CHECK DVD •A disc unusable on this camcorder may have been
inserted or the disc may be damaged.
•Make sure that the type of disc is correct, and that the
disc is not write-protected.
32, 113
CHECK HDD •Check to see whether the HDD is write-protected.
Otherwise, the HDD may be destroyed. 113
Control Information
Error.
Scenes may have been edited on another device, etc.
Update the control information. 162
•Use another disc.
•See *3 and *4 on p.156. —
COPY
PROTECTED
The video signal input to this camcorder may be copy-
guarded.
Some prerecorded video materials, such as movies, are
guarded against copying.
Copy-guarded materials cannot be recorded on this
camcorder.
123
Dubbing is not
complete.
This message will appear when dubbing has failed. —
DVD error has
occurred.
•Use another disc.
•See *3 and *4 on p.156. —
•A mismatch in recording information may be caused
when editing is done on another device.
Format the disc or use another disc.
•Formatting the disc will erase all data on it.
112
DVD error has
occurred. Finalizing
is not complete.
•Disc error occurred during finalizing, and finalizing
failed. Replace the disc.
•See *3 on p.156.
120
DVD error has
occurred. Format the
DVD now?
•Was the disc formatted on a PC, or formatting
interrupted?
Select “YES” to format the disc. Formatting the disc
will erase all data on it.
•See *2 on p.156.
112
DVD error has
occurred. Formatting
is not complete.
The disc may be dirty.
Remove the disc and wipe off fingerprints, dust, etc.,
before reusing it, or use another disc.
This message may also appear if you insert a disc for
which formatting was interrupted midway. In this case,
try formatting the disc or use another one.
112, 170
DVD error has
occurred. Keep DVD
inside & restart.
Disc error could have occurred during editing of scenes.
Turn off the camcorder with the disc being used in it,
connect AC adapter/charger, and then power the
camcorder again. Repair of scenes will be tried.
38
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

152
DVD error has
occurred.
Please keep DVD
inside and set power
switch to “DVD”.
This message appears if a disc error has occurred during
dubbing.
Leave the disc inserted and turn the power off. Connect
the AC adapter/charger to the camcorder and set the
power switch to “DVD”. The video file will be repaired.
26, 38
DVD error has
occurred.
Unfinalizing is not
complete.
This message will appear when a disc error occurs during
the unfinalization process. Replace the disc. 121
DVD full. Cannot
execute.
This message will appear if the capacity of the scene
selected is larger than the free space on the disc. Select
another scene, or use another DVD.
80
DVD must be
finalized before it
can be played back
on DVD player or
DVD recorder.
•This message will appear if you remove a DVD-RW
(VF mode)/DVD-R disc that has not been finalized.
•See *5 on p.156. 118
Drive overheat.
Please retry later.
The temperature inside the camcorder is too high. In this
case, proper writing/reading HDD/DVD may not be
possible. Turn off the power, then wait for a while.
—
DVD-R* cannot dub
the scene recorded in
STD mode and 16:9.
With a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW disc, video
cannot be recorded with a combination of movie quality
“STD” and 16:9 mode “On”. Use a DVD-RAM or DVD-
RW (VR mode) disc for dubbing.
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW
(VF mode) disc, and “+RW” will appear when using a
+RW disc.
76
DVD-R*, Different
video mode, 16:9
and 4:3 mode cannot
exist together.
With a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R disc, the movie
quality mode and 16:9 mode cannot be changed in the
middle of a disc. Change the movie to be dubbed or
replace the disc with a DVD-RAM/DVD-RW (VR
mode)/+RW disc.
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW
(VF mode) disc.
77
DVD-R*, 16:9 mode
cannot be changed,
when Video mode is
STD.
With DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R/+RW discs, the
setting of 16:9 mode is not possible when the Video mode
is STD.
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW
(VF mode) disc, and “+RW” will appear when using a
+RW disc.
76
DVD-R*, Input
Source cannot be
changed.
Once a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R has been recorded
in 16:9 mode, the input source cannot be changed.
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW
(VF mode) disc.
77
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

153
DVD-R*, Video
mode and 16:9 mode
cannot be changed.
With DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R discs, once the movie
quality and 16:9 mode are used for recording, they cannot
be changed.
* “DVD-RW (VF)” will appear when using a DVD-RW
(VF mode) disc.
76
END OF CARD No more recording on this card can be done. Delete
unnecessary stills or use another card. 102, 176
Error occurred.
Please format HDD.
An HDD error occurred which cannot be repaired. The
HDD must be re-formatted. All data will be deleted. 112
Error occurred.
Please replace DVD
or format DVD.
•An error has occurred with the inserted DVD-RAM/
DVD-RW/+RW disc which cannot be repaired.
The disc must be re-formatted. Or, use the another disc.
Formatting the disc will erase all data on it.
•See *2 on p.156.
112
Error occurred.
Please replace DVD.
An error has occurred with the inserted DVD-R disc
which cannot be repaired. Replace the disc. —
Finalize may not be
complete. Finalize
again now?
This message will appear when power is supplied again
and the disc is reinserted after power was shut off during
finalization due to a power failure, etc. Select “YES” to
make sure finalizing is complete.
120
HDD/DVD
ALMOST FULL
The remaining free space of the HDD/DVD is less than
one minute for video. Delete unwanted scenes, or use
another disc.
102, 175
HDD full.
Cannot execute.
Delete unwanted scenes. 102
HDD/DVD has no
data.
This message will appear when an attempt is made to
dub, playback, or editing with Disc Navigation when no
scene has been recorded.
—
HDD/DVD has no
PlayList.
The Playlist menu was selected in Disc Navigation, but
no playlists are stored. 97
HDD/DVD includes
protected scenes.
Delete scenes?
The disc may be software protected from a device other
than this camcorder. To release, use the device that
executed the software-protect.
—
HDD/DVD is full.
Cannot add control
info.
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that
can be entered, so the control information for generating
thumbnails cannot be added.
Combine several scenes or delete them.
102, 105
HDD error has
occurred.
Format the HDD before using the camcorder.
Formatting the HDD will delete all data recorded on it. 112
HDD error has
occurred. Format the
HDD now?
Did you interrupt the formatting of the HDD?
Select “YES”, and then format the HDD.
Formatting the HDD will delete all data recorded on it.
112
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

154
HDD error has
occurred. Formatting
is not complete.
Did you interrupt the formatting of the HDD?
Press the RESET button to execute system reset. 172
HDD error has
occurred. Restart.
An HDD error probably occurred during editing of a
video file.
Turn off this camcorder, and then connect the AC
adapter/charger and turn the power switch to “HDD”.
The video file will be repaired.
38
NO DVD This message may appear when the camcorder or disc is
moved from a cold place to a warm place.
Condensation has occurred on the lens or the HDD/DVD
drive. Do not remove the disc; leave the camcorder
turned off in a dry place for 1 – 2 hours.
168
Insert a disc. 34
•The disc is not inserted correctly.
Push the disc against the turntable at the center until a
click is heard.
•See *3 and *4 on p.156.
34
Is the disc inserted upside down?
Insert the disc with the recording side facing inward to
the camcorder body.
11, 34
No more scenes.
PlayList was deleted.
•All scenes were deleted from the playlist.
•If all registered scenes of a playlist are deselected, the
playlist will be deleted and no options can be set.
—
PlayList over limit. The maximum number of playlists is already reached. No
more playlists can be created or copied.
95
Same scenes on Play
List will be deleted.
Delete scenes?
This will appear when scenes to be deleted from a
program on the HDD or disc are linked to a playlist. (This
message will not appear if you deselect the scenes from
the playlist.)
99
Scene No.xxx is too
large. Please divide
this scene before
dubbing.
This message will appear during all scene dubbing if the
data size of the scene to be dubbed is larger than the free
space on one disc (approx. 1.4 GB, approx. 30 minutes in
FINE mode). Divide the scene, and then dub it.
103
Scenes over limit.
Cannot add scenes.
The number of scenes entered in a playlist has reached
the limit that can be entered.
Delete unnecessary scenes.
95, 99
Scenes over limit.
Cannot divide scene.
The number of entered scenes has reached the limit that
can be entered.
Delete unnecessary scenes.
95, 99
Stop processing. The C button was pressed to stop processing of multiple
scenes. —
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

155
There was no scene
which can be
deleted.
This message will appear if you try to delete multiple
scenes with Disc Navigation when all the selected scenes
have been locked. Release the lock on scenes before
deleting.
102, 110
The scene from
which Video mode/
Wide mode differs
cannot combine.
If the power switch is set to “HDD”, scenes with different
VIDEO Modes and aspect ratios (16:9/4:3) cannot be
combined. 105
The temperature of
HDD is outside the
operating
temperature range.
Please retry later.
This message will appear if the temperature of the HDD
in this camcorder is outside the operating temperature
range. Turn the camcorder off and wait for a while. The
temperature will be effectively decreased if the
camcorder is placed in a well-ventilated spot.
167, 174
The temperature of
HDD is outside the
operating
temperature range.
Turn off power.
This message will appear if the temperature of the HDD
is outside the operating temperature range. Recording on
a disc may be possible even if this message is displayed. 167, 174
This DVD cannot be
used. Please replace
DVD.
A disc that cannot be used on this camcorder has been
loaded. Check the type of disc. 31, 32
This DVD is
recorded by the PAL
system. Please
replace DVD.
This camcorder can use only discs recorded in the NTSC
system. A disc recorded in the PAL system cannot be
used. —
UNFORMAT DVD The disc is not formatted or it is damaged.
If this message appears, be sure to format the disc on this
camcorder before using it.
Re-formatting even a disc used on this camcorder may be
necessary (formatting will erase all recorded contents on
the disc). If this message appears, try to format the disc.
If the same message still appears, the disc may be
damaged. Use another disc.
112
See *2 on p.156. —
UNFORMAT HDD The HDD may not be formatted or it may be destroyed. —
Use AC adapter/
charger.
No dubbing, HDD deletion, or disc finalization is
possible with a battery. Use the AC adapter/charger.
38, 80, 120,
171
Use AC adapter/
charger.
Turn off power.
Scenes cannot be repaired when the camcorder is
powered by a battery.
If the AC adapter/charger is unavailable in handy place,
remove the disc, use the opposite side (for double sided
discs), or use another disc. Repair the disc later when you
can connect the AC adapter/charger.
38
Write protected.
Check card.
A card with the erase prevention switch locked is
inserted. Unlock the switch. 33
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

156
*1
•This message may also appear if the disc is dirty. If this message appears when a recorded disc is
recognized immediately after it is inserted, do not repair the disc; remove it and then use a soft cloth
to clean off the dirt before using it.
•This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not repair the disc; turn
the camcorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.
•If the repair message appears when you turn the camcorder on from off with a disc loaded after
recording on it, select repair.
•If the repair message appears when recording and playback are normally possible with another disc
– and no condensation has occurred, and the disc is not dirty – select repair.
*2
•This message may also appear if the disc is dirty. In this case, do not format the disc. Remove it and
then use a soft cloth to clean off the dirt before using it.
•This message may also appear when condensation occurs. In this case, do not format the disc; turn
the camcorder off, wait until it dries out, and then turn it on again.
•Formatting will delete all data on the disc.
*3
•This message may also appear when the disc is dirty. Remove the disc and then use a soft cloth to
clean off the dirt before using it.
•This message may also appear when condensation occurs. Wait until the camcorder dries out, and
then turn it on again.
*4
•This message will appear when a single-sided disc is inserted the wrong way (upside down).
Reinsert the disc correctly. (Insert the disc with the label printed surface facing toward the outside.)
*5
•Do not insert a DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R disc that has not been finalized into any DVD
recorder. The disc may become unusable.
Write protected.
Check HDD/DVD.
The HDD or disc is write-protected. Use the Disc
Navigation menu to release the protection. 113
Message Cause & Troubleshooting Reference
page

157
If you have any trouble with your camcorder, first use this troubleshooting guide to try to
solve the problem. If the problem persists, consult your dealer. Do not attempt to make
any physical repairs yourself.
Power supplies
Troub
Troub
Troub
TroubTroublesho
lesho
lesho
lesholeshooting
oting
oting
otingoting
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page
Battery cannot be
charged.
Is the DC power cord connected to the AC adapter/
charger? Unplug it. 21, 38
Is the battery abnormally hot?
Remove the battery, leave it for a while to cool down,
then charge it.
Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?
Charge the battery at 50 – 86ºF (10 – 30ºC).
—
Has the battery been unused for a long time?
Remove the battery, and then reattach it.
If the battery does not charge after trying all of the above,
it may be dead. Purchase a new battery.
38, 147
Battery weakens fast. Are you using the camcorder where the temperature is
low?
A fully charged battery (DZ-BP14S/DZ-BP14SW/DZ-
BP21SW) may be discharged sooner than usual at low
temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand.
37
Battery may be dead.
The performance of the battery will deteriorate if it is
used for an extended period of time or frequently.
Purchase a new battery.
39, 147
The CHARGE
indicator on AC
adapter/charger is
flashing.
Is the ambient temperature too low or too high?
Charge the battery at 50 – 86ºF (10 – 30ºC).
If the battery is completely drained (for example, if it has
not been used for over a year), it may take longer to begin
charging. Continue charging: after awhile, the battery
may recover enough voltage to begin charging normally
and the CHARGE indicator will light.
21

158
Power turns off
immediately after
being turned on.
Is the battery charged?
Charge it.
37
When power is
turned on, the LCD
screen will turn on
and off.
The ACCESS/PC
indicator is flashing,
even though nothing
is displayed on the
LCD monitor screen.
Power goes off
unexpectedly.
Is Power Save set to “On”?
If the camcorder is on battery power and set to “Power
Save: On”, and is left for up to 5 minutes (default setting)
without being operated, it will automatically turn off to
save battery power. To restart recording, turn the power
off and then turn it on again. You can also specify “Power
Save: Off” to stop automatic power off.
60
Is the camcorder set to the sleep mode? If 30 minutes or
more has elapsed with the camcorder in the sleep mode, it
will automatically turn off. Set the power switch to
“OFF”, and then turn it on again.
41
Power cannot be
turned off.
Detach the battery pack or disconnect the AC adapter/
charger, then press RESET. And then, turn on the power
again.
38, 172
Even if the
camcorder is off,
opening the cover
will cause the
ACCESS/PC
indicator to flash.
The camcorder will automatically turn on to recognize a
disc. Closing the cover will automatically turn the
camcorder off again. 34
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page

160
Recorded subjects
moving rapidly are
blurred during
playback pause.
For subjects moving rapidly, select “Sports” from the
Program AE options. If you record in a bright
environment, you can reduce blur. 67
Recording level
changes.
This is not a malfunction. The camcorder automatically
adjusts the recording level according to the loudness of
recorded sounds. You cannot adjust recording level
manually.
—
The LCD screen
appears unevenly.
Did you press the LCD monitor or the area around it?
If the LCD monitor is pressed, some distortion will occur.
Release your hand and leave the LCD monitor for a
while. The LCD screen will recover.
—
Focus is not correct. Is it difficult to use auto focus with your subject?
Focus manually. 65
Does the manual focus icon appear?
The camcorder is set to manual focus. Focus the subject
manually, or release manual focus.
64
If the above causes do not apply, turn off the power and
turn it on again. —
An error message for
repair appears.
Follow the on-screen instructions to repair.
You must connect the AC adapter/charger to the
camcorder to make repairs. However, as an exception, if
you are using the HDD and an error occurs in part of a
movie file, you can also use the battery pack for repair (if
the battery charge indicator shows more than half
charge).
Depending on the situation, it could take from a few
minutes to several hours for repair. If you wish to start
recording immediately, replace the disc, and do the repair
later. The removed disc can be repaired after you connect
the AC adapter/charger to the camcorder.
38
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page

161
During playback
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page
Recognition of the
disc does not
complete.
Is the disc dirty?
Use a soft cloth to clean it. 170
Pressing the
playback button will
not start playback.
Was the image recorded by another device?
Playback of some images recorded on other devices may
be impossible on this camcorder.
—
Has a scene been edited on another device?
If a scene recorded on this camcorder is edited on another
device, playback may not be possible on this camcorder.
—
No playback picture
appears on the TV
screen.
Is the TV input selector set correctly?
Some TVs have multiple video input jacks. Check
whether the correct input was selected on the TV to
match the connected jacks. If the camcorder is connected
to a VCR, set its input selector to “external input
(LINE)”.
116
Is the camcorder connected to the TV correctly?
Check the connections. 115
Images recorded in
“16:9” (wide) mode
are vertically
distorted on the TV
screen.
Have you connected the camcorder to a 4:3 TV that does
not support the wide mode feature? In such a case, set the
“TV Type” setting of the camcorder to “4:3”. 117
Playback picture is
momentarily
interrupted.
Is the disc scratched or dirty?
Clean the disc. 170
Movie playback
quality is poor
Was the image input from an analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm)
and recorded?
The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with a
TBC circuit is used for playback. (DZ-HS903A)
—
Still picture is very
blurred.
Was recording of external input made with “Frame”
specified?
Specify “Field” for “PHOTO Input” in the record
functions setup menu. (DZ-HS903A)
78
No sound. If you are viewing images on a TV, is the TV volume
control set correctly? Adjust the TV volume. 116
Disc Navigation
thumbnails do not
appear.
The original image may have been distorted when
recorded through the AV/S terminal. Record image again,
without noise or distortion.
—

162
Not displayed
normally in the disc
navigation screen.
DVD-RAM, DVD-RW(VR mode) recorded on this
camcorder and edited on another device may not be
displayed normally in the disc navigation screen. In this
event, use “Update control info.”.
If too much time is required to display the HDD disc
navigation screen, try the following.
1 Press , then press MENU.
2 Select “Disc setting” or “HDD setting” by pressing c,
then press the confirmation button.
The “Update Control info.” confirmation screen
appears.
3 Select “YES” by pressing d, then press the
confirmation button.
Update of control information will begin. While
“Updating...” is being displayed, a black screen may
appear (and time may be required).
(There are some DVD which cannot be used even by
following the above procedures.)
—
Photos on a card
cannot be played
back.
This camcorder can play back images from an SD
memory card recorded on other digital cameras
conforming to the DCF (Design rule for Camera File
system) standard. The playable pixel range of image data
on this camcorder is from 80×60 to 4000×3000
(horizontal/vertical). If the pixel data is outside this
range, blue thumbnails will appear (thumbnails* in “Fig.
1”), meaning the image is unplayable.
Even when the number of pixels is within the above
range, playback may not be possible, depending on the
recording status of the digital cameras used.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) is a unified
image file format for digital cameras. Image files
recorded using digital devices conforming to DCF can be
used in these devices interchangeably.
—
It takes some time to
play back photos on
card.
Stills with a large number of pixels will take more time to
appear. —
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page
1/ 6A l l
s c e n es
PLAY
P H O T O
SELECT
Fig. 1
*

163
When the camcorder is connected to a PC
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page
The PC does not
recognize the
camcorder.
Check that the camcorder’s power switch is set to “HDD”
or “DVD”. 22
Turn the PC off and disconnect the USB cable. Then turn
the PC back on and reconnect the cable. —
Make sure the cable is connected properly to both the PC
and the camcorder. 131
An error occurs
while playing back
movies recorded on
the camcorder using
the PC.
If error occurs with the USB connection, the transfer rate
is not sufficient. It is recommended that you use a USB
terminal conforming to USB2.0 when connecting the
camcorder.
126
The software does
not run correctly on
the PC.
Turn the PC and camcorder off, and try again.
—
An error occurs
during writing to a
disc.
The temperature of the camcorder is too high due to
continuous operation.
Disconnect the camcorder from the PC, remove the disc
from the camcorder, and then turn it off. After a few
moments, connect them again and write to a brand-new
disc.
134
Transfer of images
stops.
Connect the camcorder to another USB terminal of the
PC. If your PC is a desktop type, it is recommended that
you use a USB terminal on the back of the PC. If you are
using USB2.0 extended card, it is also recommended that
you install the newest version driver provided by the
USB2.0 card maker.
126
Is the disc scratched or dirty?
Clean the disc. 170
The DVD drive of
the PC cannot be
used after the
provided software
was installed.
Do you use another software application to edit/write
DVD? There may be a conflict between that software and
the ImageMixer 3 software. This problem may be solved
if you update the other DVD editing/creating software of
your PC.
—
An error appears
when starting
ImageMixer 3.
Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card)
conforms to Direct X® 9.0c. 126
The DISC EJECT
switch does not work
when the camcorder
is connected to a PC.
While the camcorder is connected to the PC, use Explorer
to right-click the camcorder drive icon and select “Eject”. 132

164
No sound is heard
when an MPEG file
imported into
Macintosh is played
back on QuickTime
with an MPEG 2
playback component
adopted.
Since an MPEG file imported into Macintosh using
ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition for DVDCAM uses the audio
format of AC3 audio, no audio will be played back even
if the QuickTime MPEG-2 playback component is
introduced. Only video will be played back. Use
ImageMixer 3 Mac Edition for DVDCAM for playback.
125
When the time stamp
of a file on a disc is
viewed on a PC, it is
different from the
actual recording
time.
The file system of this camcorder is operated on
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), and time lag information
has not been set. With Windows
® as of August 2008, the
time stamp of files viewed on Explorer looks different
from the actual recording time. The actual recording time
will appear for the date/time indication on the playback
screen.
—
It takes a long time
to save a video
edited on the video
editor of ImageMixer
3.
If you are editing a video file whose contents are different
from those of the project settings, it may take some time,
since the entire video file must be re-encoded. Reconfirm
the project settings.
—
Cannot import from
a DVD-R/DVD-RW.
Before importing, disconnect the camcorder from the PC
and finalize the DVD-R/DVD-RW. (Note that you cannot
add recordings to a finalized DVD-R/DVD-RW.)
118
“Hardware
Removal” results in
error.
Exit Windows®, and then disconnect the camcorder.
If your PC uses Windows® 2000 Professional, the
problem may be solved if you install Windows
® 2000
SP3 or later.
134
No USB2.0 HS (high
speed) connection
even when USB2.0
card is used.
Make sure that you have already installed the driver
provided with the USB2.0 card.
You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0
card maker in order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS
(high speed).
—
Symptom Cause and Correction Reference
page

167
z
Save the data recorded on HDD.
• To back up the data recorded on HDD, save it on a DVD.
It is also recommended that you use this camcorder to dub the data. You can also use a
PC to save the data on a DVD.
• It is recommended that you periodically save your recordings.
Carefully check the temperature of this camcorder.
• If the temperature of this camcorder is too high or too low, normal recording or
playback may not be possible.
• If the temperature of this camcorder is too high or too low, the message “The
temperature of HDD is outside the operating temperature range. Turn off power.” may
appear. Even if this happens, a DVD may be usable. So it is recommended that you
carry a spare DVD even if you intend to record on the HDD.
Do not place this camcorder near a magnet or magnetic field.
• If you so, recording, playback or dubbing may not be possible.
Do not subject the camcorder to impacts.
• This camcorder cannot be used while sky diving, riding on a roller coaster, bungee
jumping, or other situations where weightless or large impacts may ensue.
z
This camcorder is not intended for professional-use.
• The camcorder is designed and produced for home-use recording and playback. Do not
use the camcorder for professional applications.
• The camcorder cannot be used for a long time continuously as a surveillance camera/
monitor. If you use it for a long continuous period of time, the temperature of the
camcorder could exceed the limit and the recording/playback operation may slow down
or other faults could occur. If this happens, turn it off and wait for a while before using
it again.
The LCD is a very delicate display device.
• Do not hold the LCD monitor when lifting the camcorder.
The LCD monitor could detach and the camcorder may fall.
• Do not press its surface with force, hit it or prick it with a sharp object.
• If you push the LCD surface, unevenness in display may occur. If unevenness does not
disappear soon, turn the camcorder off, wait for a few moments, and then turn it on
again.
• Do not place the camcorder with the open LCD monitor down.
• Close the LCD monitor when not using the camcorder.
Cautions
Cautions
Cautions
CautionsCautions on Use of
on Use of
on Use of
on Use of on Use of this Pr
this Pr
this Pr
this Prthis Product
oduct
oduct
oductoduct
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read
- Be sure to read- Be sure to read this information -
this information -
this information -
this information - this information -

168
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
• The LCD monitor is the product of highly precise technology. Among the total number
of pixels (approx. 120,000 pixels for the LCD monitor), 0.01% or less pixels may be
missing (black dots) or may remain lit as colored dots (red, blue, green). This shows
the limitations of the current technology, and does not indicate a fault that will interfere
with recording.
Do not subject the camcorder to impact.
• This camcorder is a precision machine. Take great care that you do not strike it against
a hard object or let it fall.
• When using a tripod, firmly secure the camcorder on it. Do not use the camcorder with
a tripod in a place where it is subject to severe vibrations or impact.
Do not point directly at the sun.
• If direct sunlight strikes the lens, the camcorder could malfunction or a fire could
occur.
• Do not leave the camcorder with the LCD monitor exposed to direct sunlight: This
could cause malfunctions.
No sand or dust!
• Fine sand or dust entering the camcorder or AC adapter/charger could cause
malfunctions or defects.
Heat on surface of product
• As the disc mechanism will be very hot immediately after use, do not touch the
metallic parts.
• The surfaces of the camcorder, AC adapter/charger and battery will be slightly warm,
but this does not indicate a fault.
Be careful of ambient temperature.
• If the temperature of this camcorder is too high or too low, normal recording/playback
may not be possible.
• Take care that the temperature of this camcorder, when connected to PC does not rise
excessively (reference for usage: approx. 30 minutes at about 86ºF (30ºC)).
• If you need to use the camcorder for recording/dubbing to DVD in a place where the
temperature is high, avoid overheating by using the camcorder intermittently.
Be careful of moisture condensation.
• When you move the camcorder between places where the difference in temperatures is
great—such as entering a lodge from a ski slope or going out of a cooled room or
vehicle—condensation (vapor in air warmed or cooled to water droplets) could occur
on the lens and/or inside the camcorder. If condensation occurs, do not open the disc
compartment lid or card slot cover if possible. If condensation occurs on the lens, wipe
it off with a soft, dry cloth. Even if the external surface of camcorder has dried,
condensation may remain inside. Therefore, turn the camcorder off and leave it in a dry
place for at least 1–2 hours before using it again.

172
If the camcorder does not operate normally, perform “System Reset”. The
camcorder may recover to normal. “System Reset” will reset all settings to the
factory defaults. The date and time will also be reset. Set the date and time again
before using the camcorder.
1 Set the power switch to “OFF” to turn the
camcorder off.
Detach the battery or AC adapter/charger.
2 Use a fine tipped pen to hold down RESET for
several seconds.
All settings will be reset.
z
• Some items will not appear, depending on the disc or card inserted.
System Rese
System Rese
System Rese
System ReseSystem Reset
t
t
tt
Menu item
(1st level)
Menu item
(2nd level) Default Setting
method
Camera Functions Setup Program AE Auto p.67
White Bal. Auto p.68
ElS On p.71
Dig. Zoom 40× p.62
MIC. Filter Off p.71
Flash Auto p.72
Record Functions Setup VIDEO mode FINE p.75
Quality FINE p.77
16:9 On p.75
Input Source CAMERA p.78
PHOTO Input Field p.78
Self Timer Off p.79
OSD Output On p.116
LCD Setup LCD Adjust p.60
Date Setup Date Set 1/1/2008 12:00 AM p.23
Date Mode M/D/Y p.61
Initial Setup Beep On p.60
Power Save Off p.60
Record LED On p.74
Language English p.22
Demo Mode Auto p.61
• Do not press RESET with undue force.
• Before pressing RESET, be sure to remove the DVD from the camcorder.
Pressing RESET with a DVD loaded may erase the scenes recorded on the
DVD.

175
Movie recordable time on one DVD (on single side) (when recording only movies)
Recording quality DZ-HS903A DZ-HS803A
XTRA Approx. 7 hours*2 Approx. 1 hour 50 minutes
*2
FINE Approx. 11 hours*3 Approx. 3 hours
*3
STD Approx. 23 hours *4 Approx. 6 hours *4
Recording quality Movie recordable time
XTRA Approx. 18 minutes*2
FINE Approx. 30 minutes*3
STD Approx. 60 minutes *4
*
1: After recording continuously for 9 hours in HDD mode, the camcorder will automatically stop
recording. After approximately one minute, it will automatically restart recording. (No scene will
be recorded during this pause in recording.) As a result of this, multiple thumbnails will appear
for this recording. (DZ-HS903A)
*
2: Variable bit recording (recording of more than 7 hours (DZ-HS903A)/1 hour 50 minutes (DZ-
HS803A) on the HDD or more than 18 minutes on a DVD may be possible as the transfer rate
varies automatically between approx. 3 - 10 Mbps)
*
3: Constant bit rate: Approx. 6 Mbps
*
4: Constant bit rate: Approx. 3 Mbps
If recording is performed in XTRA mode within high temperature environments, the image quality
may be degraded to a FINE equivalent.

176
(Numbers are approximate standard.)
Recording media Maximum number of scenes
HDD*1 999*3
DVD-RAM *2/DVD-RW*2 999*3
DVD-R*2 930
+RW*2 254
*1: Recording only
*2: Per disc (one side)
*3: Combining scenes will not increase the remaining number of recordable scenes.
If there are combined scenes, the maximum number of scenes in the table may not be the same as
the actual maximum number of scenes that can be recorded/dubbed.
Recording media Maximum number of dates
HDD*1 99
DVD-RAM *2/DVD-RW*2 99
+RW*2 49
*1: Recording only
*2: Per disc (one side)
Still picture
quality
Capacity
FINE NORM ECO
32 MB
Approx. 18 Approx. 24 Approx. 37
64 MB
Approx. 38 Approx. 50 Approx. 75
128 MB
Approx. 75 Approx. 100 Approx. 150
256 MB
Approx. 150 Approx. 200 Approx. 300
512 MB
Approx. 300 Approx. 400 Approx. 600
1 GB
Approx. 600 Approx. 800 Approx. 1200

177
(Numbers are approximate standard.)
The following table shows the picture quality and the corresponding file size of
a still picture (JPEG) when you are using a card.
Still picture
quality
Capacity
FINE NORM ECO
32 MB
Approx. 180 Approx. 240 Approx. 370
64 MB
Approx. 380 Approx. 500 Approx. 750
128 MB
Approx. 750 Approx. 1,000 Approx. 1,500
256 MB
Approx. 1,500 Approx. 2,000 Approx. 3,000
512 MB
Approx. 3,000 Approx. 4,000 Approx. 6,000
1 GB
Approx. 6,000 Approx. 8,000 Approx. 12,000
Picture quality
File size
Usage
Input Source:
CAMERA
Input Source: LINE
(DZ-HS903A)
FINE
Approx. 1.6 MB Approx. 160 KB High quality
NORM
Approx. 1.2 MB Approx. 120 KB Normal quality
ECO
Approx. 0.8 MB Approx. 80 KB High quantity (lower quality)
Stills cannot be recorded on HDD/DVD.

178
Audio feedback
A screeching noise which may be
produced when the camcorder is
connected to a TV or speakers. To
prevent the noise, keep a distance
between the camcorder and the TV or
speakers, or turn off the volume of the
connected device.
Double-sided disc
A disc which allows recording on both
sides.
Finalize
The process of enabling you to play back
DVD-RW (VF mode)/DVD-R recorded
on this camcorder using other DVD
recorders/players.
Formatting
The process of preparing a disc for use by
creating an empty file system. This is also
known as initializing a disc.
Medium/Media
The built-in HDD, various types of DVD
discs and SD memory card are described
as media (or medium when singular) and
can be recorded to.
NTSC
NTSC is one of the standard color
television systems.
NTSC is in use in the United States,
Japan, Taiwan, South Korea, the
Philippines, Central and South America,
and some other countries.
PAL
PAL is one of the standard color
television systems.
PAL is in use in Europe, China, and some
other countries.
SD memory card
A memory card standard for recording
images. This camcorder allows for
recording still images to SD memory
card.
Single-sided disc
A disc which allows recording on one
side only.
VF (Video) mode
One of two modes for using a DVD-RW
disc.
You need to finalize a DVD-RW disc in
VF mode before playing it back on
another device. After finalizing, you
cannot make additional recordings on the
DVD-RW disc, regardless of its free
space. The advantage of VF mode is that
it is highly compatible with other DVD
players.
VR mode
One of two modes for using a DVD-RW
disc.
The advantage of VR mode is that you
can edit (split, delete, and combine)
movies using the camcorder, and, by
deleting unnecessary scenes, you can free
up space for more recording.
Glossary
Glossary
Glossary
GlossaryGlossary

179
A
AC adapter/charger .................... 21, 37, 38
ACCESS/PC indicator .................... 34, 170
B
Backlight compensation.......................... 67
Battery pack
charging ......................................... 21
life .................................................. 39
Beep ....................................................... 60
B/W (fade)............................................. 106
C
Capacity................................................ 114
Card
available functions.......................... 30
format........................................... 112
handling ......................................... 33
insert/remove ................................. 27
CARD ACCESS indicator ....................... 15
Category ......................................... 86, 114
Combine ............................................... 105
Connecting TV...................................... 115
Copy ..................................................... 109
Copyright ................................................ 12
D
Date setup .............................................. 23
Defaults........................................... 72, 172
Delete (edit) .......................................... 102
Delete (playlist) ....................................... 99
Delete (scene) ...................................... 102
Demo mode ............................................ 61
Detail .................................................... 111
Digital zoom ............................................ 62
Disc navigation ................................. 48, 88
exit ................................................. 49
Divide.................................................... 103
Dubbing
D 0ub mark ....................................... 8
from HDD to disc ........................... 80
mark off.......................................... 86
menu.............................................. 82
DUBBING button .................................... 82
DVD
available functions.......................... 30
cleaning........................................ 170
handling........................................ 170
player.............................................. 12
protect .......................................... 113
recorder.......................................... 12
storing .......................................... 170
DVD-R
finalize .......................................... 120
insert/remove ........................... 25, 34
note ................................................ 32
DVD-RAM
format ........................................... 112
insert/remove ........................... 25, 34
DVD-RW
finalize .......................................... 120
format ..................................... 36, 112
insert/remove ........................... 25, 34
unfinalize ...................................... 121
E
Edit (playlist) ........................................... 98
Edit (scene)................................... 102, 105
EIS .......................................................... 71
Erasure prevention switch....................... 33
Error message ...................................... 148
Exposure control ..................................... 66
F
Fade...................................................... 106
filter diameter .......................................... 64
Finalization............................................ 118
Flash ....................................................... 72
FOCUS button ........................................ 65
Format................................................... 112
Frame advance/Frame back ................... 54
FULL AUTO button.................................. 72
Full format ............................................. 171
G
Go to (on Disc Navigation).............. 50, 109
H
Hand strap .............................................. 18
HDD
available functions.......................... 30
format ........................................... 112
protect .......................................... 113
HDD complete deletion ......................... 171
Howling ................................................. 115
Index
Index
Index
IndexIndex

180
I
Information Display during playback....... 52
Information display during recording....... 42
Information display mode.................. 42, 52
Infrared sensor........................................ 69
Initial Setup............................................. 60
J
Jump....................................................... 51
L
Language................................................ 22
LCD adjust .............................................. 60
LCD BRIGHTNESS button ..................... 20
LCD monitor
handling ....................................... 167
How to open................................... 19
setting ............................................ 60
Lock ...................................................... 110
Low Light (Program AE) ......................... 68
M
Macintosh ..................................... 125, 127
Macro Recording .................................... 63
Major specifications .............................. 173
Manual focus .......................................... 64
Menu........................................... 57, 5 , 8 88
MIC. Filter ............................................... 71
Moisture condensation.......................... 168
N
Names of parts ....................................... 14
O
Optional accessories ............................ 147
P
PHOTO capture ...................................... 56
Play
playlist ............................................ 97
program.......................................... 93
Repeat Play ................................... 56
scene ............................................. 28
Slide Show..................................... 55
Playlist .................................................... 95
Portrait (Program AE) ............................. 67
Power Save............................................. 60
Program .................................................. 92
Program AE ............................................ 67
Protect .................................................. 113
Unprotect ..................................... 113
Provided accessories.............................. 13
Q
Quality
movie.............................................. 75
still picture ...................................... 77
QUICK MENU ................. 57, 58, 59, 90, 91
QUICK START ........................................ 41
R
Recording indicator ................................. 74
Record LED ............................................ 74
Remaining space .................................... 44
Remote control
code ............................................. 116
Inserting a battery .......................... 17
Repeat play............................................. 56
Reset....................................................... 60
+RW
finalize .......................................... 120
format ..................................... 36, 112
insert/remove ........................... 25, 35
unfinalize ...................................... 121
S
Sand&Snow (Program AE) ..................... 68
Scene
delete ............................................. 29
Detail ............................................ 111
play................................................. 28
SD memory card ..................................... 33
Searching for image ................................ 54
Self timer................................................. 79
Shoulder Strap ...................................... 147
Skip....................................................... 107
Skip (scene) ............................................ 54
Sleep mode............................................. 41
Slide show............................................... 55
Slow playback ......................................... 54
Spotlight (Program AE) ........................... 67
System reset ......................................... 172
T
Tele-conversion lens ............................... 63
Test recording ......................................... 11
Thu bm nail ....................................... 48, 108
Transferring data to your PC ................. 135
Tripod ...................................................... 68
U
Unfinalize .............................................. 121
Update control info................................ 162
USB cable ............................................. 130

181
V
Video mode ............................................ 75
Volume.................................................... 52
W
Wall ou 8tlet ............................................... 3
W b 8hite alance......................................... 6
White fade............................................. 106
Wide conversion lens.............................. 63
Wide mode (16:9)........................... 75, 117
W windo s ....................................... 125, 126
Wipe fade.............................................. 106
Z
Zoom ...................................................... 62
Zoom lever.................................. 52, 62, 65

182
This Agreement will take effect at the moment you open the package of the storage device (CD-ROM)
provided with this product, if you agree to the terms herein.
If you do not accept the terms of this Agreement, immediately return the unopened package of storage
medium and enclosed materials (printed matter, external package, and all others) to your dealer, or
return only the package of storage medium to your dealer.
Consult your dealer for any refund on the unused product. However, if only the package of storage
medium is returned, no refund is possible.
This License Agreement certifies that you were granted license in the past.
License Agreement
■Grant of License
• Hitachi, Ltd. nonexclusively grants you the right to install this program in one computer and use it,
but this right cannot be transferred to a third party.
• You can duplicate one copy of this program in a form readable on computer, but only for the
purpose of backup, and under the condition that the display concerning the copyright remains in the
original status.
■Prohibition
• This program may not be used on network. If you wish to use it for multiple computers on network,
you must obtain the right of use for each computer from Pixela Corporation.
• You may not let any third party use this program by granting reuse, transfer, lease, lending, etc.
• You may not modify, alter, decompile or deassemble all, or any part, of this program or its
accessories. And you may not allow any third party do so.
■Termination of Agreement
If you duplicate this program and its accessories without permission, or fail to comply with the above
granting conditions, this agreement will automatically be terminated. In addition, Pixela Corporation
may take legal action. When the agreement is terminated, you will be obliged to discard this program,
its accessories and all duplicates, or return them to Pixela Corporation.
■Guarantee and Immunity
This program and its accessories shall not, explicitly or implicitly, conform to the merchantability or
compatibility for your specific purpose of use. Pixela Corporation does not guarantee that the
functions of this program will meet your needs or this program will be free from interruption or error
during its operation.
Under no circumstances will Pixela Corporation accept any responsibility for any direct or indirect
losses or damages you may incur from using this program or activities relating to its use, or for any
conflict occurring between you and a third party originating from, or relevant to, use of this program.
Be sure to read
Be sure to read
Be sure to read
Be sure to readBe sure to read the following
the following
the following
the following the following before ope
before ope
before ope
before ope before opening the
ning the
ning the
ning the ning the
packag
packag
packag
packagpackage of CD-ROM
e of CD-ROM
e of CD-ROM
e of CD-ROMe of CD-ROM


U.S.A. ONLY
NOT VALID IN CANADA
or MEXICO
• DVD Products
• VCR Products
• CAMCORDER Products
• AC ADAPTER CHARGER
Conditions of
Hitachi Limited Warranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
Hitachi Home Electronics (America), Inc.
(“Hitachi,”) warrants this component in duration as
stated below:
Hitachi Home Electronics (America), Inc.
• 90 DAYS LABOR (Carry-in)
• 1 YEAR PARTS (Except Battery)
Hitachi Home Electronics
(America), Inc.
900 Hitachi Way
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556
Tel: 1-800-HITACHI
REGISTER YOUR HITACHI PRODUCT
ON-LINE AT HITACHI.COM/TV
(Continued on reverse side)
These Hitachi Products are warranted to be free
of defects in parts and workmanship at the time
of purchase by the original owner. If this product
is found to be defecti e, Hitachi will repair or v
replace defective parts at no charge to the
original owner. Parts used for replacement are
warranted for the remainder of the original Limited
Warranty period. For 90 days from the date of
original purchase, Hitachi will pro ide labor for the v
repair or replacement of defective parts without
charge, subject to the following conditions:
1. Owner must pro erification of the date of v vide
purchase when requesting Limited Warranty
Service. (Dated Sales Receipt Required)
2. All repairs must be performed by a Hitachi
Authorized Service Facility.
3. This warranty is alid only in the U.S.A.v
For information concerning repairs, operation,
technical assistance or for referral to the location of
your nearest Authorized Service Facility or Parts
Distributor, call: 1-800-HITACHI (1-800-448-2244)

REGISTER YOUR PRODUCT ON-LINE AT
HITACHI.COM/TV
OR MAIL IN TO ADDRESS ON THIS CARD.
Model No.
Serial No.
Customer Name
Date of purchase
Customer Address
City State Zip
Phone No.
( )
Dealer name
Dealer address
City State Zip
“In order to allow Hitachi to better ser e customer needs, please v
complete this card and return it to Hitachi Home Electronics
(America), Inc. Completion of this card is not required in order to
validate your Hitachi limited warranty, but would assist us in
developing better ser ices and programs for our customers.”v
(Please print or type)

Register your product on-line at hitachi.com/tv
or mail this portion to the following address
Attn:Warranty Department
Hitachi Home Electronics (America), Inc.
900 Hitachi Way
Chula Vista, CA 91914-3556



Specyfikacje produktu
Marka: | Hitachi |
Kategoria: | kamera wideo |
Model: | DZ-HS903A |
Potrzebujesz pomocy?
Jeśli potrzebujesz pomocy z Hitachi DZ-HS903A, zadaj pytanie poniżej, a inni użytkownicy Ci odpowiedzą
Instrukcje kamera wideo Hitachi

8 Października 2024

19 Września 2024

13 Września 2024

10 Września 2024

9 Września 2024

9 Września 2024

5 Września 2024

5 Września 2024

4 Września 2024

3 Września 2024
Instrukcje kamera wideo
- kamera wideo Sony
- kamera wideo Samsung
- kamera wideo Leica
- kamera wideo Logitech
- kamera wideo Xiaomi
- kamera wideo Sharp
- kamera wideo Braun
- kamera wideo Voltcraft
- kamera wideo Milwaukee
- kamera wideo Philips
- kamera wideo SilverCrest
- kamera wideo Xblitz
- kamera wideo Panasonic
- kamera wideo Canon
- kamera wideo Mio
- kamera wideo Viewsonic
- kamera wideo Nedis
- kamera wideo Medion
- kamera wideo OK
- kamera wideo Lenco
- kamera wideo Fujifilm
- kamera wideo Toshiba
- kamera wideo Hazet
- kamera wideo Garmin
- kamera wideo Salora
- kamera wideo Evolveo
- kamera wideo HP
- kamera wideo Soundmaster
- kamera wideo Hyundai
- kamera wideo SJCAM
- kamera wideo Creative
- kamera wideo Swann
- kamera wideo Nikon
- kamera wideo Kodak
- kamera wideo Cisco
- kamera wideo SBS
- kamera wideo Kenwood
- kamera wideo DJI
- kamera wideo Gembird
- kamera wideo Minox
- kamera wideo Cobra
- kamera wideo JVC
- kamera wideo Trust
- kamera wideo Linksys
- kamera wideo Thinkware
- kamera wideo AgfaPhoto
- kamera wideo Vimar
- kamera wideo Ricoh
- kamera wideo Renkforce
- kamera wideo Rollei
- kamera wideo Marshall
- kamera wideo Trotec
- kamera wideo Uniden
- kamera wideo DataVideo
- kamera wideo Pyle
- kamera wideo Zoom
- kamera wideo Midland
- kamera wideo Speco Technologies
- kamera wideo Samson
- kamera wideo ARRI
- kamera wideo Olympus
- kamera wideo Navitel
- kamera wideo GoClever
- kamera wideo ION
- kamera wideo Maginon
- kamera wideo Intenso
- kamera wideo Polaroid
- kamera wideo Prestigio
- kamera wideo Konica Minolta
- kamera wideo Sanyo
- kamera wideo Oregon Scientific
- kamera wideo Bresser
- kamera wideo Jay-Tech
- kamera wideo Hama
- kamera wideo GoPro
- kamera wideo Insignia
- kamera wideo Extech
- kamera wideo TomTom
- kamera wideo Denver
- kamera wideo Bushnell
- kamera wideo Berger & Schröter
- kamera wideo Tracer
- kamera wideo RCA
- kamera wideo Klein Tools
- kamera wideo Genius
- kamera wideo BenQ
- kamera wideo Trevi
- kamera wideo Magellan
- kamera wideo Lexibook
- kamera wideo Overmax
- kamera wideo Sencor
- kamera wideo Insta360
- kamera wideo EasyMaxx
- kamera wideo Blackmagic Design
- kamera wideo DOD
- kamera wideo Steinberg
- kamera wideo Best Buy
- kamera wideo Lamax
- kamera wideo Transcend
- kamera wideo Elmo
- kamera wideo Vitek
- kamera wideo Laserliner
- kamera wideo Vivitar
- kamera wideo Quintezz
- kamera wideo Aiptek
- kamera wideo AEE
- kamera wideo Airis
- kamera wideo ATN
- kamera wideo Activeon
- kamera wideo Energy Sistem
- kamera wideo Easypix
- kamera wideo Nilox
- kamera wideo Flir
- kamera wideo Coby
- kamera wideo Envivo
- kamera wideo TacTic
- kamera wideo Macally
- kamera wideo Bauer
- kamera wideo Naxa
- kamera wideo Mamiya
- kamera wideo Ricatech
- kamera wideo Konig
- kamera wideo Tronje
- kamera wideo Mpman
- kamera wideo Nikkei
- kamera wideo T'nB
- kamera wideo Ematic
- kamera wideo Minolta
- kamera wideo Zagg
- kamera wideo Veho
- kamera wideo Dnt
- kamera wideo Zorki
- kamera wideo Contour
- kamera wideo Iget
- kamera wideo RunCam
- kamera wideo Drift
- kamera wideo SeaLife
- kamera wideo Sakar
- kamera wideo Jobo
- kamera wideo Dragon Touch
- kamera wideo Mediacom
- kamera wideo Kreator
- kamera wideo Contax
- kamera wideo EE
- kamera wideo Traveler
- kamera wideo Contour Design
- kamera wideo Kaiser Baas
- kamera wideo Bluetech
- kamera wideo Braun Phototechnik
- kamera wideo Spypoint
- kamera wideo Kitvision
- kamera wideo Praktica
- kamera wideo MMTC
- kamera wideo Flip
- kamera wideo Kogan
- kamera wideo BlackVue
- kamera wideo Brinno
- kamera wideo DXG
- kamera wideo Storex
- kamera wideo MD 80
- kamera wideo Vupoint Solutions
- kamera wideo Leotec
- kamera wideo Skytronic
- kamera wideo Whistler
- kamera wideo Curve
- kamera wideo PCE Instruments
- kamera wideo CamOne
- kamera wideo Mobius
- kamera wideo ISAW
- kamera wideo Beaulieu
- kamera wideo Revier Manager
- kamera wideo Kobian
- kamera wideo FHD 1080P
- kamera wideo RSC
- kamera wideo Stealth Cam
- kamera wideo Aqua-Vu
- kamera wideo Hamlet
- kamera wideo Qoltec
- kamera wideo Replay
- kamera wideo Akaso
- kamera wideo Hamilton Buhl
- kamera wideo Aida
- kamera wideo Rexing
- kamera wideo IOPLEE
- kamera wideo Moultrie
- kamera wideo Microtek
- kamera wideo Teslong
- kamera wideo Izzo
Najnowsze instrukcje dla kamera wideo

30 Marca 2025

30 Marca 2025

30 Marca 2025

30 Marca 2025

28 Marca 2025

28 Marca 2025

28 Marca 2025

27 Marca 2025

14 Marca 2025

12 Marca 2025